Fostex Musical Instrument VF08 User Manual

8588 002 000  
(340292)  
Owner’s Manual  
Digital Multitracker  
INPUT A  
BAL  
ST OUT  
FOOT SW  
PHONES  
INPUT B  
BAL  
L
R
MIX PARAMETER  
TRACK  
EDIT  
SCENE  
SCENE SEQ.  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
ON/OFF  
ACCESS  
BOUNCE MODE  
2TRK MODE  
MASTERING  
TRAINING  
CH ON/OFF  
CH ON/OFF  
PEAK  
PEAK  
PHANTOM  
F1  
F2  
F3  
RED  
REC  
GREEN  
PLAY  
OFF  
MUTE  
TRACK STATUS  
STATUS  
/SEL  
TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL  
JOG SHUTTLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7/8 2TRK  
CURSOR  
MASTER  
EXIT  
/NO  
EJECT  
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
ENTER  
/YES  
0
0
TIMEBASE  
UNDO  
/REDO  
SETUP  
F1  
SEL  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F3  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F2  
SHIFT  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
LOCATE  
WAVE FORM  
SCRUB  
AUTO  
PUNCH  
VARI  
LOOP  
EDIT  
PITCH  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
EDIT  
MARK  
DELETE  
F FWD  
EDIT  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
-  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
LOCATE ABS 0  
LOCATE REC END  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Contents  
• Safety Instructions ...........................................2  
• Basic recording (recording onto two track) .......... 27  
Preparation for recording ........................................ 27  
Recording .................................................................. 28  
Playback .................................................................... 28  
Basic Features of VF08  
• Product Features................................................ 6  
• Mark function ................................................... 29  
Setting a mark on the fly .......................................... 29  
Locating a mark ........................................................ 29  
Deleting a mark ........................................................ 29  
• Precautions ........................................................ 7  
About power supply ................................................... 7  
Precautions upon handling the hard disk................. 7  
Note on repair ............................................................. 7  
About copyright.......................................................... 7  
About damage ............................................................. 7  
• ABS Locate....................................................... 30  
• Punch In/Out .................................................... 30  
Manual punch in/out using the keys on the unit ... 30  
Punch in/out using the Foot Switch ........................ 30  
Auto punch in/out function .................................... 31  
• Before Operating ................................................ 8  
RECORDING method ................................................... 8  
Program....................................................................... 8  
Remain Indicator ........................................................ 8  
Additional track .......................................................... 9  
INPUT monitor and REPRO monitor .......................... 9  
Event............................................................................ 9  
Trim ........................................................................... 10  
Time Base .................................................................. 10  
• Mixing ............................................................... 33  
Adjusting levels ........................................................ 33  
Setting PAN position ................................................. 33  
Adjusting EQ ............................................................. 33  
Setting effects............................................................ 34  
• Mix Down .......................................................... 35  
Analog Mix Down...................................................... 35  
Digital Mix Down ...................................................... 35  
Names and Functions  
Top panel (Analog input/output section) .............. 12  
Top panel (Mixer section) ........................................ 13  
Top panel (Recorder/display section) .................... 14  
Rear panel ................................................................. 17  
Side Panel .................................................................. 17  
Mixer Functions  
• Initial condition when turning the power ......... 36  
• Operations while the Normal display is shown 36  
Fader.......................................................................... 36  
Track mute ................................................................ 36  
Master fader mute .................................................... 36  
About the hard disk storage device  
Reformatting the Hard Disk ..................................... 18  
Replacing a Hard Disk .............................................. 19  
Formatting the New Hard Disk ................................ 21  
• Mix Parameter Edit ........................................... 37  
Adjusting PAN position ........................................... 37  
Editing EQ ...............................................................38  
Preset entries in the EQ library ...............................39  
Basic Recording and Playback  
Editing effects .........................................................41  
Setting effects send level ..................................... 42  
Selecting an effect type........................................ 42  
Selecting pre/post of the effect send .................. 43  
Turning the effect processor on or off................ 43  
About the effect types.......................................... 44  
Scene memory ........................................................47  
Storing the current scene .................................... 47  
Recalling a scene .................................................. 47  
Deleting a scene ................................................... 48  
Fader adjust.......................................................... 48  
Scene sequence ......................................................49  
Assigning scene memories to the mark map ...... 49  
Deleting a mark from the mark map .................. 50  
Scene sequence on/off selection ......................... 50  
• Connections of external equipment ................ 22  
• LCD ................................................................... 23  
Display when turning on the power ........................ 23  
Switching the time base............................................ 23  
“Disk remain” indication ......................................... 23  
• Preliminary knowledge .................................... 24  
Inputs and tracks ...................................................... 24  
How to use condenser microphones........................ 24  
• Basic recording (recording onto a single track) .. 25  
Preparation for recording ........................................ 25  
Recording .................................................................. 26  
Playback .................................................................... 26  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
• Training mode .................................................... 69  
Connecting the instrument and headphones ........ 69  
On/Off of training mode ....................................... 69  
Slowing down the playback speed......................... 70  
Changing the pitch ................................................ 70  
Canceling the center-positioned sound ................. 70  
Setting the cancel position .................................... 70  
Boosting the bass sound ........................................ 70  
Playing along with the playback sound ................. 70  
Recorder Functions  
• Cueing .............................................................. 51  
Cueing with the [F FWD]/[REWIND] keys ............... 51  
Shuttle cueing ......................................................... 51  
Digital scrubbing ..................................................... 52  
Performing digital scrubbing .............................. 52  
Storing the digital scrub point ............................ 52  
• Variable Pitch.................................................... 53  
Turning on or off the vari pitch function ............... 53  
Setting the Speed ...................................................... 53  
• Mastering mode ............................................... 71  
Selecting a program to be played back .................. 71  
On/Off of mastering mode .................................... 71  
Setting the mastering effects ................................. 72  
On/Off the mastering effects ................................. 72  
Recording onto the master recorder ..................... 72  
Effect library details .............................................. 72  
• Loop Function .................................................. 54  
Setting the start and end points .............................54  
Capturing the current position on the fly .......... 54  
Editing the position via the screen ..................... 54  
Setting the start and end points by marks ......... 55  
Carrying out the loop playback............................... 55  
• Digital Recording ............................................. 74  
Recording an external source onto the VF08 digitally 74  
Selecting a program to be recorded ...................... 74  
Selecting the digital input ..................................... 74  
Selecting a track to record ..................................... 74  
Starting to record .................................................. 74  
• Program............................................................ 56  
Creating a new program ........................................... 56  
Selecting a program.................................................. 57  
Deleting a program................................................... 57  
Editing a program title ............................................. 57  
• MIDI Clock Sync System .................................. 75  
Connecting to external equipment ........................ 75  
Setup of the VF08 .................................................. 76  
Executing of recording .......................................... 76  
Confirming the MIDI clock sync ............................ 76  
• Track editing ..................................................... 58  
Copy & Paste and Move & Paste .............................58  
Performing Copy (or Move) Paste ....................... 59  
Undo/redo of Copy (or Move) Paste ................... 60  
Erasing track data ................................................... 61  
Erasing .................................................................. 61  
Undo/redo of Erase.............................................. 62  
Track Exchange .......................................................63  
Performing the track exchange ........................... 63  
• MIDI Sync/MIDI Machine Control System ........ 76  
Connecting to external equipment ........................ 77  
Setup of external equipment ................................. 77  
Setup of the VF08 .................................................. 77  
Confirming MTC sync/MMC ................................. 77  
Executing of recording .......................................... 77  
• Editing marks ................................................... 64  
Viewing the mark list ............................................... 64  
Editing a mark position ........................................... 64  
Enter a mark title ..................................................... 65  
Adding a mark ......................................................... 65  
Deleting a mark .......................................................66  
Locating a mark.......................................................66  
• External MIDI equipment Sync System by the Slave Mode..78  
Connecting to external equipment ........................ 78  
Setup of external equipment ................................. 78  
Setup of the VF08 .................................................. 78  
Confirming chase lock ........................................... 78  
Executing of recording .......................................... 79  
Save/Load of Song Data  
Advanced Operation  
• About Song Data .............................................. 80  
Items that can be saved or loaded as song data ......... 81  
Notes for digital audio recorder to be used ................ 81  
Notes for saving data using the S/P DIF digital signal 81  
• Metronome function......................................... 67  
Setting the tempo map ............................................... 67  
Setting the metronome output................................... 67  
Setting the time base to bar/beat ............................... 67  
Monitoring the metronome sound ............................ 67  
• Saving data using the S/PDIF digital signal..... 82  
Connecting to an external digital recorder ................ 82  
Setting the external recorder ..................................... 82  
Saving data................................................................. 82  
• Track bounce (Ping-pong recording) ............... 68  
On/Off of bounce mode ............................................. 68  
Setting pan position ................................................... 68  
Setting level of each track .......................................... 68  
Performing the track bounce ..................................... 68  
• Loading data using the S/PDIF digital signal .. 84  
Connecting to an external digital recorder ................ 84  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Setting the external recorder ..................................... 84  
Loading data .............................................................. 84  
Others  
• MIDI Implementation Chart ............................ 111  
• MMC Command List....................................... 112  
• Inquiry Message List...................................... 112  
• Maintenance................................................... 113  
• Specifications ................................................ 113  
• Block Diagram................................................ 114  
• Installing the Model 8340 SCSI card .............. 115  
• Saving /Loading Data using SCSI .................... 86  
Connecting to an external device ............................... 86  
Formatting a backup disk .......................................... 86  
Saving data to a SCSI disk ........................................... 87  
Loading from a single SCSI disk.................................. 89  
Loading from more than one disk .............................. 90  
• Save/Load a WAV File ....................................... 92  
Saving a WAV file ....................................................... 93  
Loading a WAV file ..................................................... 96  
SETUP Mode  
To enter the SETUP mode ................................ 99  
• Time Signature Setting..................................... 99  
New Registering of Time Signature ............................ 99  
Correcting the Registered Time Signature ............... 100  
Deleting of Time Signature ...................................... 100  
Clearing All Time Signature data ............................. 100  
Changing the Bar Offset Figure ................................ 100  
• Setting a Tempo.............................................. 101  
New Registering of Tempo ....................................... 101  
Correction of the Registered Tempo ........................ 102  
Erasing of the Registered Tempo ............................. 102  
• Setting the Metronome function .................... 102  
• Setting MIDI sync output signal..................... 103  
• Setting an MTC frame rate ............................. 103  
• Setting an MTC offset value ........................... 104  
• Setting MTC offset mode ............................... 104  
• Setting the Slave mode .................................. 105  
• Setting the Slave type .................................... 105  
• Setting the Record Protect function .............. 106  
• Setting Digital Input ....................................... 107  
• Setting BAR/BEAT Resolution mode............. 107  
• Setting the MIDI device number..................... 108  
• Checking the number of track events............ 108  
• The Drive Format Information........................ 109  
• Drive Setting................................................... 109  
• Fader Fix mode Setting .................................. 110  
• Fader Recall mode Setting............................. 110  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Features of VF08  
Basic Features of VF08  
The VF08 Digital Multitracker incorporates a digital mixer with an 8-track (plus 16-additional track)  
digital recorder.  
The digital mixer section features a high-performance DSP multi-effect processor employing the A.S.P.  
(Fostex Advanced Signal Processing) technology originally developed by Fostex. The digital recorder  
section allows you to record and playback uncompressed linear 16-bit/44.1 kHz digital audio.  
You can make all process for music production such as overdubbing, track bounce, effect processing,  
mixdown and mastering in the digital domain without sound deterioration.  
Product Features  
Mixer Section  
• Nondestructive audio editing functions such as  
• Built in a high-performance DSP multi-effect  
processor employing the A.S.P. (Fostex Advanced  
Signal Processing) technology  
copy, paste, move, erase and undo/redo are  
possible.  
• The "Program" function allows you to give a title to  
each song and manage up to 99 titles.  
• 7 track faders and a stereo master fader allow you  
to control signal levels intuitively.  
• +/- 6.0% pitch control.  
• The track ON/OFF switch is provided for each track.  
The 2-band EQ with the EQ library and the effect  
send with PRE/POST selection are provided for  
Tracks 1 through 6.  
• Accepts S/PDIF digital signal and records it directly  
onto any VF08 track.  
• The auto punch in/out function with rehearsal  
mode. The IN and OUT points can be set with 1/100  
frame accuracy.  
You can also carry out punch in/out manually  
using the foot switch.  
• Both balanced (XLR) and unbalanced (1/4" phone)  
connectors are provided for each analog input.  
The phantom power is also available when using the  
balanced connector. Also the trim knob on each  
input makes it possible to accept a wide range of  
input signals from microphone to line levels.  
Others  
• Dot-matrixLCDandself-illuminatingkeysallowyou  
toknowthecurrentstatusvisually, aswellastomake  
settings of the mixer and recorder easily.  
• "Bounce" function allows bouncing signals from  
tracks 1 through 6 to tracks 7/8 with a single key  
operation.  
• Durable and reliable 3.5-inch E-IDE standard hard  
disk is built in.  
• "Mastering effect" allows effect processing for the  
master tracks (7/8).  
• Optional SCSI card (Model 8340) allows save/load  
of all VF08 data (both recorder and mixer data)  
using an external SCSI device.  
• "Training mode" helps you to practice your  
instrument by slowing down playback, shifting the  
pitch of the recorded performance or masking the  
solo instrument/voice.  
• Save/load of song data using the S/PDIF (optical)  
signal is possible.  
• "Scene memory" function allows you to save and  
load up to 99 mixer scenes including fader positions  
and EQ/effect settings.  
• Feeds MIDI clock with song position pointer or MTC  
(MIDI Time Code).  
• Youcanfeedthemixed-downsignalfromtheS/PDIF  
output connector to an external digital device such  
as a DAT recorder for digital recording.  
• Supports MMC (MIDI Machine Control).  
• Can be slaved to an external MTC.  
• The internal metronome function can be used for  
recording a guide track.  
Recorder Section  
• Employs the Fostex original FDMS-3 (Fostex Disk  
Management System-3) format, allowing high  
quality recording/playback with uncompressed  
linear 16-bit/44.1 kHz digital audio on 8 tracks, as  
well as 16 additional tracks. You can record about  
3 hours of mono audio per 1 GB disk space.  
• The bar/beat resolution function allows editing by  
beat (the clock digit is omitted).  
• Up to 99 mark points can be set per each song. You  
can locate any mark point or make the mark map of  
a scene.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Features of VF08  
Precautions  
About power supply  
Precautions upon handling the HD  
• Be sure to connect the VF08 to the power supply specified  
in the Specifications section of this owner’s manual.  
Do not use an AC outlet of any other voltage.  
• Do not connect the VF08 to the same AC outlet to which  
devices that could generate noise (such as a large motor  
or dimmer), or the devices that consume a large amount  
of power (such as an air conditioning system or large  
electric heater) are connected.  
• Before turning the power off to the VF08, first quit setup  
mode and make sure that the recorder section is stopped.  
Especially, neverattempttoturnoffthepowertotheVF08  
while the hard disk is accessing data (the HD ACCESS LED  
is lit or flashing). Otherwise, not only will you lose  
recorded data, but you may damage to the VF08.  
Fostexisnotresponsibleforthedatalostduringoperation  
of the VF08.  
• If you use the VF08 in an area with a different power  
voltage, first consult your dealer or the nearest Fostex  
service station. You can use the VF08 with a power  
frequency of 50Hz or 60Hz.  
• It is very dangerous to use a power cord that is frayed or  
damage. In such a case, stop using the VF08 immediately  
and ask your dealer to repair the cord.  
• Before you change the location of the VF08, pack the unit  
in the shipping carton or an impact-resistant case.  
Make sure that the VF08 is kept free from external  
vibration or impact since the VF08 is very sensitive to  
vibration.  
• Do not install the VF08 in locations subject to the  
following:  
• To avoid possible electric shock and damage to the VF08,  
avoidcontactwithwaterorotherliquids, ordonothandle  
the power plug while your hands are wet.  
* Extremely high or low temperature, or significant  
changes in temperature.  
* Excessive humidity or dust.  
• To prevent possible electric shock and damage to the  
VF08, do not remove the main unit cover or reach the  
inside the VF08.  
* Excessive changes in power supply voltage.  
* Unstable or significantly vibrating or shaking  
surfaces.  
• Do not let water or other liquid, or metal objects such as  
pins, accidentally enter the inside of the VF08 because  
this may lead to electric shock or damage. Should water  
enter the inside of the VF08, remove the power plug from  
AC outlet, and consult your dealer or the nearest FOSTEX  
service station.  
• To prevent damage to the VF08, be sure to power on the  
connected devices first, then turn on the power to the  
VF08. When you remove or connect the cables to the  
input/output connectors on the VF08, make sure that the  
track and master faders and volume controls are set to  
“0.”  
* Near a strong magnetic field (such as a TV or  
speaker).  
• If you move the unit from a place with an excessively low  
temperature to a warm place, or if you use the VF08 in a  
roominwhichthetemperaturevariessignificantlyduring  
winter, condensation may occur on the hard disk or other  
parts. In such cases, leave the VF08 for about an hour in  
the new location before you turn on the power.  
Note on repair  
• The VF08 does not use any parts that user can repair  
easily. Contact your dealer or the nearest FOSTEX service  
station to ask about repairs.  
• Use the packing carton designed for the VF08 when you  
transport the VF08 to the dealer for repair or return.  
If you have discarded the packing box, try to pack the  
VF08 completely using shock absorbing materials.  
Fostex is not responsible for malfunction or damage due  
to incomplete packaging or caused during transport.  
Important!  
Equipment name, electrical  
MODEL VF08  
ratings, serial number and  
other information for the  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
FOSTEX  
230V~  
18W  
50/60Hz  
VF08, are written on bottom  
side.  
SERIAL NO.  
FOSTEX CORP.  
MADE IN CHINA  
Delay of display indication  
• While using the VF08, you may have an experience to see  
the delay of the reaction of the time counter or level  
meters. This is not a malfunction and it bears no relation  
to the actual sound to be recorded or played.  
About copyrights  
• It is prohibited by law to use any part of a CD recording  
or video images or audio data for which copyright is  
possessed by a third party for commercial purposes such  
as contents, broadcasts, sales, or distribution-any  
purpose other than for your personal pleasure.  
Time counter  
Level meters  
About damage  
• Fostex is not responsible for any “direct damage” or  
“indirect damage” caused by using the VF08.  
This kind of delay is due to the VF08 design concept in which  
the audio processing takes priority over the display  
processing when the audio processing gets busy (e.g. when  
a sudden fader level change happens). You may always trust  
the VF08 to record or playback audio in good condition.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Features of VF08  
Before Operating  
This section describes the basics that you should know before you start operating the VF08.  
All users, including those who are familiar with using tape-based Multitracker and those who are new  
to Multitracker, should read this section thoroughly to understand the functions of the VF08.  
Recording method  
Remain indicator  
The VF08 uses a hard disk as a recording medium,  
instead of a conventional tape.  
Theremainindicatorshowshowmuchrecordingtime  
is left on the current hard disk.  
You can start recording sound sources from any point  
on a disk as long as the point is within the range of 24  
hours in ABS time. Also you locate any point within  
the range. You may think of the VF08 as incorporat-  
ing tapes on which 24-hour time information is  
striped.  
The VF08 program is managed by a 24-hour time  
counter, however, the actual recording time left de-  
pends on the available disk space.  
The remain indicator appears on the LCD during re-  
cording (or on REC standby), showing the rough re-  
maining time if you record on a mono track.  
ABS0  
REC END  
15m 00s  
23h 59m 59s  
......  
00m 00s  
05m 00s  
10m 00s  
Note that if the remaining time is 100 hours or more,  
the indicator shows the available (remaining) disk  
space in MB.  
recorded area unrecorded area recorded area unrecorded area  
You can record at any point within 24 hours in ABS time.  
Youcanrecordinanyareawithin24hoursinABStime.  
ABS 0: The beginning time at 00H 00M 00S  
REC END: The end time of recording (in the example  
above, 00H 15M 00S)  
The remaining time is 13h 28m15s.  
24 hour recording  
5 minute recording 5 minute recording  
unrecorded  
......  
recorded area recorded area unrecorded area (remain)  
With a tape recorder, the maximum recording time  
depends on the tape length, regardless of the amount  
of unrecorded areas. With the VF08, you can use the  
media more efficiently because no disk space is used  
for unrecorded areas.  
The remaining value is calculated on a mono-track  
basis. That is, the value indicates recordable time if  
you record on a mono track. You can calculate the  
recordable time when recording on more than one  
track easily by dividing the time by the track num-  
ber.  
Program  
You can use up to 99 "tapes with 24-hour time infor-  
mation" with the VF08. Each "tape" is called a "Pro-  
gram".  
A program exists independently on the hard disk,  
therefore, you can freely record, playback or edit each  
program without affecting other programs.  
You can give a name (program title) to each program,  
so you can easily identify a program.  
In the example above, if you record on 2 tracks, the  
recordabletimeisabout6hours44minutes(13hours  
28 minutes 15 seconds divided by 2). Or if you record  
on 8 tracks, the recordable time is about 1 hour 41  
minutes (13 hours 28 minutes 15 seconds divided by  
8).  
"Program title" with its program number appears at  
the top left of the normal screen as shown below.  
The VF08 manages up to 99 programs on the hard  
disk. Each program includes not only the recording  
data but also various setting information which con-  
sumes a small amount of disk space. Therefore, note  
thattheremainingtimeshownonthescreenisarough  
value.  
Program number/title ("01" is the program number while  
"#0001" is a default title)  
Always check the remaining time left before starting  
recording, to ensure that you have enough disk space  
to work with.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Features of VF08  
Additional track  
Event  
A program on the VF08 consists of 24 tracks. Tracks  
1 through 8 are called "Real tracks" which you can  
record, playback and edit. Tracks 9 through 24 are  
called"Additionaltracks". Usingthe"TrackExchange"  
function, you can exchange between "real track(s)"  
and "additional track(s)" in one-track, 2-track or 8-  
track block.  
Each time you make a recording, an independent  
audio file is created on each recorded track. A silent  
part on a track is also recognized as a file. These files  
(audio files and silent files) are called "events".  
With the VF08, you can create up to 512 events per  
track. You cannot make any further recording when  
512 events are created. In the normal use, 512 events  
are enough.  
The VF08 can show the current number of events on  
the LCD. It also shows a warning message if you are  
going to make recording when 512 events already  
exist. You may resolve this problem by saving the  
program (see "Save/Load of a program").  
This makes it possible to record solo on several tracks,  
exchange tracks and compare the results, or to record  
different rhythm versions using multiple tracks, ex-  
change the rhythm tracks completely and making a  
remix version.  
Note that tracks 9 through 24 cannot be recorded,  
played or edited. The tracks you want to work with  
must be set as tracks 1 through 8.  
Let's count the events for each recording step (A  
through E) below.  
A.Beforerecording, thereisasingleevent(silentfile)onthetrack  
(the VF08 recognizes a silent part as a file).  
One track exchange  
8 track block exchange  
B.After making a recording (REC B), there are two events on  
the track; the recorded audio file and the following silent part.  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
Track 6  
Track 7  
Track 8  
Track 17  
Track 18  
Track 19  
Track 20  
Track 21  
Track 22  
Track 23  
Track 24  
Track 9  
Track 10  
Track 11  
Track 12  
Track 13  
Track 14  
Track 15  
Track 16  
C.After making another recording (REC C) continuously from  
the end point of REC B, there are three events on the track;  
two audio files and the following silent part.  
D.After locating a point ahead of REC C and then making an  
other recording (REC D), there are totally five events on the  
track. Note that a silent file is created between Rec C and Rec  
D.  
2 track block exchange  
8 track block exchange  
E.After making a recording (REC E) over REC B and REC C,  
there are four events on the track.  
A
B
C
D
E
Silence  
Input monitor and Repro monitor  
Rec B  
Rec B  
Rec B  
Silence  
There are two modes for monitoring a track of the  
VF08 ; "Repro monitor" and "Input monitor".  
Rec C  
Rec C  
Silence  
Rec D  
Rec D  
"Repro monitor" means that the track playback sig-  
nal is monitored.  
Silence  
Silence  
Silence  
Rec E  
Silence  
"Input monitor" means that the input source of the  
track is monitored. You can check the signal level for  
recording in this mode.  
Input monitor is only available for tracks to be re-  
corded (on REC standby) or currently being recorded.  
Signal output from the recorder  
Signal input in the recorder  
Playback sound (Playback monitor)  
1 track  
2 track  
Playback sound (Playback monitor)  
Input signal (Input monitor)  
3 track  
4 track  
READY  
Input signal (Input monitor)  
READY  
Playback sound (Playback monitor)  
Playback sound (Playback monitor)  
Playback sound (Playback monitor)  
Playback sound (Playback monitor)  
5 track  
6 track  
7 track  
8 track  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Features of VF08  
Bar/Beat/Clk shows the musical position generated  
from the internal tempo map of the VF08 (including  
time signature and tempo).  
Trim  
It is important to set the analog input level appropri-  
ately when converting an analog input signal from  
[INPUT] A or B into a digital signal (A/D conversion).  
You can adjust the analog level using the [TRIM] con-  
trol. The [PEAK] indicator lights if the level is too high.  
The example below shows the current recorder posi-  
tion is at beat 1 of bar -2.  
This position (beat 1 of bar -2) corresponds to ABS 0  
and the following bar/beat numbers are determined  
according to the time signature and tempo settings.  
If the [TRIM] setting is not appropriate and the ana-  
log input level is too high (if the PEAK indicator lights),  
the signal will be converted into a distorted digital  
signal, resulting digital noise. You cannot eliminate  
this distortion/noise from the sound in the following  
stages. Therefore, be sure to adjust the level appro-  
priately using the [TRIM] knob not to light the [PEAK]  
indicator when receiving the loudest audio input sig-  
nal.  
Appropriate gain  
Excessive gain  
Clip level  
Beat 1 of bar -2 corresponds to ABS 0 as the default  
setting, however, you can change to set it between bar  
-9 and bar -2.  
MTC (MIDI Time Code) runs in sync with the ABS time.  
The MTC value (**h**m**s) corresponding to ABS 0  
can be set, which is called "MTC offset".  
Clip level  
If you set the MTC offset to 01h00m00s, the MTC will  
start from 01h00m00s, and at the ABS 01h00m00s  
position, the MTC value will be 02h00m00s.  
The example below shows that the current position is  
at MTC 00h59m57s.  
Time Base  
The term "Time base" frequently appears in this  
manual. The time base is used to show the location in  
the recorder, like the "tape counter" of conventional  
tape recorders.  
There are three types of time bases:  
1. ABS (Absolute time)  
2. Bar/Beat/Clk (Bar/Beat/Clock)  
3. MTC (MIDI Time Code)  
You can switch between these time bases by pressing  
the [TIME BASE SEL] key.  
The ABS shows the absolute time of each program and  
is striped from 00h00m00s (=ABS 0) to 23h59m59s  
when a program is created.  
ThedefaultMTCoffsetis00h59m57s00f00sf. Youcan  
change the offset to any time value of 24-hour clock.  
The example below shows the current recorder posi-  
tion is at 00m (minute) 00s (second) 00f (frame). The  
hour digit appears only when the ABS time exceeds  
01h00m00s00f.  
It is also possible to set the MTC offset by setting the  
MTC value corresponding to "beat 1 of bar 1" instead  
of "ABS 0".  
ABS 0 is the reference position for managing all the  
location and related to other time bases.  
The following diagram illustrates the relationship  
between the three time bases.  
ABS 0  
00M 00S  
00M 03S  
00M 06S  
.....  
.....  
.....  
ABS  
BAR/ /CLK  
MTC  
- 002BAR  
1
001BAR  
1
002BAR  
1
00H 59M 57S  
01H 00M 00S  
01H 00M 03S  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and functions  
Names and Functions  
Top panel  
ST OUT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
FOOT SW  
PHONES  
INPUT B  
BAL  
L
R
MIX PARAMETER  
TRACK  
EDIT  
SCENE  
SCENE SEQ.  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
UNBAL  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
TRIM  
ON/OFF  
ACCESS  
BOUNCE MODE  
2TRK MODE  
MASTERING  
TRAINING  
CH ON/OFF  
CH ON/OFF  
PEAK  
PEAK  
PHANTOM  
F1  
F2  
F3  
RED  
REC  
GREEN  
PLAY  
OFF  
MUTE  
TRACK STATUS  
STATUS  
/SEL  
TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL  
JOG SHUTTLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7/8 2TRK  
CURSOR  
MASTER  
EXIT  
/NO  
EJECT  
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
ENTER  
/YES  
0
0
TIMEBASE  
UNDO  
/REDO  
SETUP  
F1  
SEL  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F3  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F2  
SHIFT  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
LOCATE  
WAVE FORM  
SCRUB  
AUTO  
PUNCH  
VARI  
LOOP  
EDIT  
PITCH  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
EDIT  
MARK  
DELETE  
F FWD  
EDIT  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
-  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
LOCATE ABS 0  
LOCATE REC END  
Rear panel  
S/P DIF / DATA  
MIDI  
OUTPUT  
POWER  
PHANTOM  
ON  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
OFF  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and functions  
Top panel (Analog input/output section)  
2
4
6
8
9
10  
1
3
5
7
INPUT A  
BAL  
ST OUT  
FOOT SW  
PHONES  
INPUT B  
BAL  
L
R
MIX PARAMETER  
TRACK  
EDIT  
SCENE  
SCENE SEQ.  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
ON/OFF  
12  
11  
ACCESS  
BOUNCE MODE  
2TRK MODE  
MASTERING  
TRAINING  
CH ON/OFF  
CH ON/OFF  
PEAK  
PEAK  
PHANTOM  
F1  
F2  
F3  
RED  
REC  
GREEN  
OFF  
PLAY  
MUTE  
TRACK STATUS  
STATUS  
/SEL  
TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL  
JOG SHUTTLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7/8 2TRK  
CURSOR  
MASTER  
EXIT  
/NO  
EJECT  
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
ENTER  
/YES  
0
0
TIMEBASE  
UNDO  
/REDO  
SETUP  
F1  
SEL  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F3  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F2  
SHIFT  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
LOCATE  
WAVE FORM  
SCRUB  
AUTO  
PUNCH  
VARI  
LOOP  
EDIT  
PITCH  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
EDIT  
MARK  
DELETE  
EDIT  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
-  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
LOCATE ABS  
0
LOCATE REC END  
* When this connector is plugged, the input from the  
[INPUT B/BAL] connector is interrupted.  
1. [INPUTA/UNBAL] (Unbalanced) connector  
* Connectstotheunbalancedoutputofanexternalsound  
source.  
5. [INPUT B/BAL] (Balanced) connector  
* Connects to the balanced output of an external sound  
source.  
* Reference input level: -50 dBV to +2 dBV (approx. -48  
dBu to +4 dBu)  
* Reference input level: -50 dBV to +2 dBV  
* Connector type: phone jack  
* When this connector is plugged, the input from the  
[INPUT A/BAL] connector is interrupted.  
* Connector type: XLR-3-31 type (pin #2 hot)  
* A phantom power (+48 V) can be supplied for using a  
condenser microphone by setting the [PHANTOM]  
switch on the rear panel to ON.  
* When the [INPUT B/UNBAL] connector is plugged, the  
input from this connector is interrupted.  
2. [INPUT A/BAL] (Balanced) connector  
* Connects to the balanced output of an external sound  
source.  
* Reference input level: -50 dBV to +2 dBV (approx. -48  
dBu to +4 dBu)  
* Connector type: XLR-3-31 type (pin #2 hot)  
* A phantom power (+48 V) can be supplied for using a  
condenser microphone by setting the [PHANTOM]  
switch on the rear panel to ON.  
* When the [INPUT A/UNBAL] connector is plugged, the  
input from this connector is interrupted.  
6. [INPUT B/TRIM] knob  
* Controls the gain according to the signal from [INPUT B].  
* You can adjust the gain to accept input signals between  
-50 dBV (MIC) and +2 dBV (LINE).  
7. [PHONES] (Headphones) knob  
* Adjusts the level of headphones for monitoring.  
3. [INPUT A/TRIM] knob  
* Controls the gain according to the signal from [INPUT  
A].  
* You can adjust the gain to accept input signals between  
-50 dBV (MIC) and +2 dBV (LINE).  
8. [PHONES] (Headphones) connector  
* Connects headphones for monitoring.  
* Connector type: TRS phone jack  
4. [INPUT B/UNBAL] (Unbalanced) connector  
* Connectstotheunbalancedoutputofanexternalsound  
source.  
* Reference input level: -50 dBV to +2 dBV  
* Connector type: phone jack  
9. [ST OUT L. R] (Stereo out) connector  
* Outputs the stereo (L and R) buss signal.  
* Connects to a master recorder, etc.  
* Reference output level: -10 dBV  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and functions  
* Connector type: phone jack  
12. [CH ON/OFF] keys  
* Each key is used to turn on and off of the  
10. [FOOT SW] (Foot switch) connector  
* Connects to an optional foot switch (Model 8051) for  
punch in/out operation.  
corresponding channel. When on, the key illuminates.  
See the following description for details about how to use  
each element.  
* Connector type: phone jack  
11. [PEAK] indicators  
* Each indicator lights up when the corresponding input  
signal reaches the clipping level.  
* Set the [TRIM] knob properly not to light the indicator.  
Top panel (Mixer section)  
15  
14  
18  
16  
20  
21  
17  
19  
INPUT A  
BAL  
ST OUT  
FOOT SW  
PHONES  
INPUT B  
BAL  
L
R
MIX PARAMETER  
SCENE SCENE SEQ.  
TRACK  
EDIT  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
ON/OFF  
ACCESS  
BOUNCE MODE  
2TRK MODE  
MASTERING  
TRAINING  
CH ON/OFF  
CH ON/OFF  
PEAK  
PEAK  
PHANTOM  
F1  
F2  
F3  
RED  
REC  
GREEN  
OFF  
PLAY  
MUTE  
TRACK STATUS  
STATUS  
/SEL  
TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL  
JOG SHUTTLE  
22  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7/8 2TRK  
CURSOR  
MASTER  
EXIT  
/NO  
13  
EJECT  
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
ENTER  
/YES  
0
0
TIMEBASE  
UNDO  
/REDO  
SETUP  
F1  
SEL  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F3  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F2  
SHIFT  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
LOCATE  
WAVE FORM  
SCRUB  
AUTO  
PUNCH  
VARI  
LOOP  
EDIT  
PITCH  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
EDIT  
MARK  
DELETE  
EDIT  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
-  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
LOCATE ABS  
0
LOCATE REC END  
24  
23  
13. [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys  
* While stopped, each key is used to change the track  
14. [BOUNCE MODE] key  
* Turns the bounce mode on or off.  
status among OFF, PLAY and REC (READY).  
Duringplayback, pressingthekeyswitchesbetweenOFF  
and PLAY.  
When on (the key lights), tracks 7-8 are automatically  
armed for recording, allowing track 1 through 5 signals  
to bounce to track 7 and 8.  
During recording, you cannot change the track status.  
* When you view or edit mixer parameters such as pan  
and EQ in the "Mix parameter edit" mode (described  
later), you can select the target track by pressing the  
corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key.  
* The illumination of each key shows the track status as  
follows.  
15. [MIX PARAMETER-PAN] key  
* When viewing or editing the pan pot setting, press this  
key.  
* Select the track to be viewed or edited by pressing the  
corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key.  
• flashing in red: the track is in REC READY.  
• lighting in red: the track is being recorded.  
• lighting in green: the track can be played back.  
• not lighting (off): the track is muted.  
16. [MIX PARAMETER-EQ] key  
* When viewing or editing the EQ setting, press this key.  
* Select the track to be viewed or edited by pressing the  
corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and functions  
17. [MIX PARAMETER-SCENE / FADER] key  
* When storing, recalling or deleting a scene memory,  
press this key.  
* To view track fader positions, press this key while de  
pressing the [SHIFT] key.  
21. [2TRK MODE-MASTERING] key  
* Turns on or off the "Mastering mode" in which tracks  
7-8 are played back with the mastering effects. When  
the mode is active, the key lights up.  
22. [STATUS/SEL-MASTER] key  
* Turns on or off the master channel.  
* Also used to select the track for the mix parameter edit.  
18. [MIX PARAMETER-EFFECT / ON/OFF] key  
* When selecting the internal DSP effects, adjusting the  
effect send levels, selecting pre or post of the effect send,  
or setting effect parameters, press this key.  
* Select the track to be viewed or edited by pressing the  
corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key.  
23. [MASTER] fader  
* Adjusts the output levels of the stereo L/R busses.  
24. Track faders  
* Adjusts the playback levels of the tracks 1 through 6 and  
19. [MIX PARAMETER-SCENE SEQ. / MAP] key  
* Turns on or off the scene sequence mode.  
* When editing the scene sequence map, press this key  
while depressing the [SHIFT] key.  
7-8.  
20. [2TRK MODE-TRAINING] key  
* Turns on or off the "Training mode" in which only tracks  
7-8 are played back. When the mode is active, the key  
lights up.  
Top panel (Recorder/Display section)  
27  
28  
25  
26  
INPUT A  
BAL  
ST OUT  
FOOT SW  
PHONES  
INPUT B  
BAL  
L
R
MIX PARAMETER  
TRACK  
EDIT  
SCENE  
SCENE SEQ.  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
ON/OFF  
ACCESS  
BOUNCE MODE  
2TRK MODE  
29  
30  
MASTERING  
TRAINING  
CH ON/OFF  
CH ON/OFF  
PEAK  
PEAK  
PHANTOM  
F1  
F2  
F3  
RED  
REC  
GREEN  
OFF  
PLAY  
MUTE  
TRACK STATUS  
STATUS  
/SEL  
TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL  
JOG SHUTTLE  
31  
32  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7/8 2TRK  
CURSOR  
MASTER  
EXIT  
/NO  
EJECT  
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
33  
ENTER  
/YES  
0
0
34  
35  
36  
TIMEBASE  
UNDO  
/REDO  
SETUP  
F1  
SEL  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F3  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F2  
SHIFT  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
LOCATE  
WAVE FORM  
SCRUB  
AUTO  
PUNCH  
VARI  
PITCH  
LOOP  
EDIT  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
EDIT  
MARK  
DELETE  
EDIT  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
-  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
LOCATE ABS  
0
LOCATE REC END  
48  
37  
47 46 4541 40 39 38  
44 43  
42  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and functions  
speed depending on the rotating direction and degree.  
25. [TRACK EDIT / PGM] key  
* When editing audio of tracks such as copy/paste, etc.,  
34. [SHIFT] key  
press this key.  
There are four audio editing functions.  
a. copy  
b. move  
* Used to activate the second (shifted) functions of keys  
and a dial. Each shifted function is labeled in a while-  
line boxes on the panel.  
c. erase  
d. track exchange  
35. [LOCATE |<< / MARK] key  
* Each press of this key locates the previous mark point.  
* Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key  
stores the current position in the mark map.  
* Pressing this key while depressing the [SHIFT] key  
allows you to carry out the following program-related  
functions.  
a. creating a new program  
36. [LOCATE >>| / DELETE] key  
b. selecting a program  
c. editing a program title  
d. deleting a program  
* Each press of this key locates the next mark point.  
* Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key  
delete the current mark point directly.  
26. [CURSOR left/right/up/down] keys  
* Used to move the edit point in edit or setup mode.  
37. [F FWD >>] key  
* Pressing this key while stopped fast-forwards the  
position at 30x speed.  
* Pressing this key during playback moves forward the  
position at 3x speed with audible cue.  
27. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)  
* Displays the recorder or mixer status or parameters.  
* Pressing this key while holding down the [STOP] key  
executes the "LOCATE REC END" function (locates the  
last recording position of the current program).  
28. Contrast adjusting knob  
* Adjusts the LCD contrast.  
Turning the knob clockwise makes the contrast higher,  
while turning it counterclockwise makes it lower.  
38. [REWIND <<] key  
* Pressing this key while stopped rewinds the position at  
30x speed.  
29. [ACCESS] indicator  
* Lights up while the internal hard disk drive or external  
* Pressing this key during playback moves backward the  
position at 3x speed with audible cue.  
* Pressing this key while holding down the [STOP] key  
executes the "LOCATE ABS 0" function (locates the  
beginning of the current program).  
backup SCSI device is writing or reading data.  
<Caution>  
Do not turn off the VF08 power while this indicator  
lights. Data recorded in the disk may be erased.  
39. [PLAY] key  
* Pressing this key starts the recorder playback.  
* Pressing the [RECORD] key while holding down this key  
(or pressing this key while holding down the [RECORD]  
key)startsrecordingofthearmed(RECREADY)track(s).  
* Pressing this key alone during recording punches out  
(releases recording).  
30. [PHANTOM] indicator  
* Lights up when the phantom power is supplied.  
You can switch the phantom power on or off by the  
[PHANTOM] switch on the rear panel.  
31. [EXIT/NO / EJECT] key  
* Pressing this key while holding down the [STOP] key  
locates the last playback position.  
* Used to cancel or interrupt SETUP menu settings or  
audio editing functions such as Copy and Paste.  
The opposite of the [ENTER/YES] key.  
* When the optional SCSI card (Model 8340) is installed  
and an external SCSI device is connected, while "SCSI"  
is selected in the "Drive setting" menu, pressing this key  
while holding down the [SHIFT] key removes a  
removable disk for backup.  
40. [STOP] key  
* Pressing this key during playback, recording, fast-  
forward or rewinding stops the recorder running.  
* Also used to cancel or interrupt SETUP menu settings  
or audio editing functions such as Copy and Paste.  
* Pressing the [F FWD] or [REWIND] key while holding  
down this key executes the "LOCATE REC END" or  
"LOCATE ABS 0" function.  
32. [ENTER/YES] key  
* Used to execute SETUP menu settings or audio editing  
functions such as Copy and Paste. The opposite of the  
[EXIT/NO / EJECT] key.  
* Pressing the [PLAY] key while holding down this key  
locates the last playback position.  
* Pressing the [RECORD] key while holding down this key  
locates the last recording position.  
33. [JOG / SHUTTLE] dial  
41. [RECORD] key  
* When the [WAVE FORM SCRUB] key is illuminated, after  
pressing any of the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys,  
rotating this dial scrubs audio digitally with no pitch  
change for both forward and backward directions.  
* Used to change a parameter value in the edit mode.  
* Pressing this dial while holding down the [SHIFT] key  
moves the position forward or backward at 1x to 64x  
* Pressing the [PLAY] key while holding down this key (or  
pressing this key while holding down the [PLAY] key)  
starts recording of the armed (REC READY) track(s).  
* Pressing this key alone switches the monitor of the  
armed track (s) to Input monitor (the [RECORD] key  
flashes).  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and functions  
Pressing this key again switches the monitor back to  
Repro monitor.  
* Pressing this key while holding down the [STOP] key  
locates the last recording position.  
* When a key icon is shown above "F3" on the screen,  
pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key  
executes the function directly.  
In the example below, pressing the [SETUP / F1]  
key, [TIME BASE SEL / F2] key or [UNDO/REDO / F3]  
key executes "RECALL", "STORE" or "DELETE" re-  
spectively.  
42. [WAVE FORM SCRUB] key  
* Pressing this key enters the scrub mode. In the scrub  
mode, you can scrub audio forward or backward  
digitally.  
43. [VARI PITCH / EDIT] key  
* Pressing this key switches between On and Off of the vari  
pitch (vari-speed playback/recording) function.  
When the function is active, this key is illuminated.  
* Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key  
makes you ready to edit the pitch value via the screen.  
44. [LOOP / EDIT] key  
F1  
F2  
F3  
* PressingthiskeyswitchesbetweenOnandOffoftheloop  
mode. When the mode is active, this key is illuminated.  
* Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key  
makesyoureadytoedittheloopparameters(Startpoint  
and End point) via the screen.  
Recalling a scene  
Deleting a scene  
Storing a scene  
TIMEBASE  
SEL  
SETUP  
F1  
UNDO / REDO  
F3  
45. [AUTO PUNCH I/O / EDIT] key  
* PressingthiskeyswitchesbetweenOnandOffoftheauto  
punch mode. When the mode is active, this key is  
illuminated.  
* Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key  
makes you ready to edit the auto punch parameters (In  
point and Out point) via the screen.  
F2  
SHIFT  
46. [TIME BASE SEL / F2] key  
* Pressing this key switches the time base shown on the  
screen among the following.  
a. ABS (absolute time):  
Absolute time from 00h00m00s to 23h59m59s.  
b. Bar/Beat/Clk (Bar/Beat/Clock):  
Bar/Beat/Clock according to the time signature and  
tempo information set in the internal tempo map.  
c. MTC (MIDI Time Code)  
MTC with or without an offset to the ABS time.  
* When a key icon is shown above "F2" on the screen,  
pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key  
executes the function directly.  
47. [SETUP / F1] key  
* Pressing this key enters the setup mode for editing/  
setting the initial setting parameters of recorder and  
mixer.  
* When a key icon is shown above "F1" on the screen,  
pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key  
executes the function directly.  
48. [UNDO/REDO / F3] key  
* Pressing this key cancels the operation for the audio  
editing (Copy, Paste, etc.), auto punch in/out or  
recording, and returns to the previous condition.  
This is the "undo" function.  
* Pressing this key again returns to the condition before  
carrying out the "undo" function. This is the "redo"  
function.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names and functions  
Rear panel  
S/P DIF / DATA  
OUTPUT INPUT  
MIDI  
OUTPUT  
POWER  
PHANTOM  
ON  
OFF  
INPUT  
54 55  
49  
51 52 53  
50  
49. [AC IN] connector  
53. [S/P DIF / DATA INPUT] connector  
* Accepts the S/P DIF digital signal. Used to connect to the  
coaxial (S/P DIF) digital output of an external digital  
device. If the external device only provides the optical  
digital output, use the Fostex COP-1 coaxial/optical  
converter.  
* Connects the supplied AC power cord. Make sure that  
the voltage of your AC outlet matches the specified  
voltage.  
50. [POWER] switch  
* Turns on or off the power of the unit.  
* Connector: RCA pin jack  
54. [MIDI OUTPUT] connector  
* Connects to the MIDI IN connector of an external MIDI  
device.  
* Mainly transmits MIDI information for synchronization  
such as MTC (MIDI Time Code) and MIDI clock with song  
position pointer.  
51. [PHANTOM] ON/OFF switch  
* When the switch is set to ON, the phantom power is  
supplied to the condenser microphone(s) connected to  
the [INPUTA/BAL] and/or the [INPUTB/BAL] connector(s).  
52. [S/P DIF / DATA OUTPUT] connector  
* Outputs the S/P DIF digital signal. Used to connect to  
the coaxial (S/P DIF) digital input of an external digital  
device.  
If the external device only provides the optical digital  
input, use the Fostex COP-1 coaxial/optical converter.  
* Connector: RCA pin jack  
* Connector: DIN 5-pin type  
55. [MIDI INPUT] connector  
* Connects to the MIDI OUT connector of an external MIDI  
device.  
* Mainly receives MIDI control information such as MMC  
(MIDI Machine Control).  
* Connector: DIN 5-pin type  
See an appropriate section for the detailed information of  
each operation or function.  
Side panel  
56  
56. Slot for the optional card  
* See page 115 for details about how to install the optional  
SCSI card.  
If you want to know details about the option, contact  
your dealer or a Fostex sales office.  
* You can install the Model 8340 optional SCSI card in this  
slot. By installing the SCSI card, you can save or load  
song data using an external SCSI device (MO, zip, etc.).  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the hard disk storage device  
About the hard disk storage device  
The VF08 is complete with a 3.5-inch E-IDE hard disk (storage device) which is formatted in the Master  
8 mode. Therefore, there is no need to newly assemble a hard disk or to format the hard disk.  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key while “IDE” is flashed.  
The menu to select the format type appears.  
4
Reformatting the hard disk  
The display will appear as follows, according to the  
previous format type. ****” represents the name of the  
drive.  
This section describes how to reformat the hard disk.  
The VF08 adopts a “FDMS-3 (Fostex Disk Management  
System-3)” format which is a Fostex exclusive format.  
24 additional tracks can be used in addition to  
recording and playing 8-tracks of uncompressed  
44.1kHz/16 bit high quality sound.  
The hard disk formatted in the “Standard” type upon  
newly formatting the hard disk will show “Standard” and  
Erase”. The hard disk formatted in the “Quick” type  
upon newly formatting the hard disk will show  
Standard” and “Quick”. The user can select one.  
<Precaution>  
Note that, when you reformat your hard disk, you will  
erase all data saved or recorded on the hard disk, as well  
as all the settings made. Reformatting your hard disk  
restore the VF08 back to the default setting.  
Always make a point to check that there is no data that  
you need remaining on the hard disk prior to  
reformatting.  
Flashing  
1
2
Turn ON the VF08.  
or  
Press the [SETUP] key.  
ThesystemwillgototheSETUPmode. Theselectdisplay  
of the SETUP menu appears. (The highlight indicates  
the menu that is currently selected.)  
Flashing  
The hard disk is formatted with the access time  
of the unit sectors, while judging whether the  
sectors are good or bad. The formatting time  
Turn the [JOG] dial to highlight the “Disk Format” menu  
3
title, press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
“IDE” indicates the current drive. SCSI” indicates the  
backup SCSI drive.  
tends to be longer with this type, however, the  
“Standard”  
reliability is better.  
Therefore, it is recommended that this default  
format type is selected under normal  
conditions.  
This choice is only available when a hard disk  
previously formatted in the “Standard” type is  
being reformatted. With this format, the  
“Erase”  
“Standard” type is maintained, while all data on  
the hard disk are erased. The formatting time is  
shorter than the time required to format a  
“Standard” type.  
This is a quick formatting procedure in which all  
hard disk sectors are considered to be good  
sectors. The formatting time is fast, however, the  
procedure cannot discover bad sectors.  
“Quick”  
Therefore, itisrecommendedthatthisformattype  
is only used when formatting a new hard disk that  
Fostex has already confirmed to operate  
normally.  
Flashing  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Abouttheharddiskstoragedevice  
Select the format type with the [CURSOR </>] key. Then  
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
5
Replacing a hard disk  
The format type selected is set and “Sure?” flashes.  
The user can immediately start recording with the  
VF08. Note that the current hard disk can also be  
replaced with another model for use with the VF08.  
(However, please only use hard disks that Fostex  
recommends.)  
<Operation Confirmed HD List for the VF08>  
The updated information on the operation-  
confirmed HD and backup media for VF08 is  
mentioned in the following Fostex international  
web site.  
Flashing  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key while the [RECORD] key  
6
is depressed.  
If the “Standard” format is selected and executed, the  
formatting process takes place while showing the  
progress of the good sectors (Good ***MB) on the disk,  
bad sectors on the disk (Bad ***MB) and remainder  
(Remain ***MB).  
<http: // www. fostex.co.jp/int/index.htm>  
For those who are unable to check our web site,  
please contact the Fostex distributor in your  
territory.  
Nothing can be done during the formatting process.  
Please wait for a while until the process is completed.  
<Warning>  
This section describes the procedures to replace the hard  
disk. However, we recommended that the customer ask  
the Fostex Customer Service Department to replace the  
VF08 hard disk. Note that the product is not warranted  
for any malfunctions that may occur after the customer  
replaces the hard disk on their own. Also note that Fostex  
will not be held liable for any accidents that may occur  
during the replacement process or any hard disk  
damages, if the customer decides to replace their own  
hard disk on their own.  
When the hard disk is successfully formatted  
(formatting completed), the number of sectors and  
noncontiguous sectors are shown after formatted, then  
Completed!” lights up. Formatting is completed  
instantaneously if either “Erase” or “Quick” is selected  
and executed.  
For this reason, the “Completed!” message lights up  
without showing the progress status while formatting  
is taking place.  
<Precautions Upon Replacement>  
* Always turn OFF the power of the VF08 and unplug the  
power plug from the electric outlet when replacing the  
hard disk.  
* Always place the hard disk on a flat and stable platform  
during the replacement process. Place a soft cloth  
under the unit to protect the product from scratching.  
Gloves are recommended to prevent any hand injuries.  
<Precautions Upon Handling the Hard Disk>  
* A hard disk is an extremely sensitive precision device.  
Never expose the hard disk to “strong shocks” when  
replacing, assembling or handling. Never leave the  
hard disk by a device that generates strong magnetic  
fields.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to escape from  
7
* Always set the DIP switch and Jumper of the newly  
assembled hard disk to the “MASTER” setting.  
The hard disk will not operate normally if the setting  
is set to “SLAVE” when the hard disk is assembled.  
Refer to the User’s Manual of the hard disk for more  
details on the DIP switch and Jumper settings.  
the SETUP mode.  
The Normal Screen appears indicating the beginning of  
the program (P01) that is automatically created after  
formatting the hard disk.  
* Note that the connector of some hard disks may be stiff,  
and thus make it difficult or impossible to insert or  
connect. Never apply excessive force to insert the  
connector in such case. Always make a point to gently  
insert the connector. Failure to do so may result in  
unexpected injuries or damage the hard disk.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the hard disk storage device  
Unscrew the four screws from the bottom of the main  
unit that are fixing the panel.  
After disconnecting the cables, remove the panel that  
is fixing the hard disk.  
1
4
Unscrew the four screws with a screwdriver, as shown  
in the Figure.  
2
1
3
4
Turn over the panel that the hard disk is fixed according  
to the instructions shown in the figure below.  
Note that hard disk cables will be connected.  
Be careful not to apply excessive force when turning  
over the panel.  
2
Fix a new hard disk to the panel in the reverse order of  
removing the hard disk as performed earlier. Connect  
the cables. Then house the hard disk at the bottom of  
5
the main unit.  
Follow the <Precautions> described earlier, and  
properly assemble the parts.  
Remove the two cable connectors that are connected  
to the hard disk.  
3
Gently hold the connector and slowly pull out.  
Whenthenewharddiskissuccessfullyassembled,  
go to the next section. Now, format the  
unformatted hard disk.  
1
2
3
4
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Abouttheharddiskstoragedevice  
Formatting the Hard disk  
Carefully follow the instructions below to newly format the hard  
disk properly.  
Flashing  
Turn ON the VF08 after plugging the power cable in the  
1
electric outlet.  
The VF08 will startup. Unformat!” will appear on the  
LCD. The menu will automatically go to the SETUP  
mode.  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key while the [RECORD] key  
is depressed.  
The formatting process is started. The formatting  
process will take some time.  
When the formatting is successfully completed,  
Completed!” will light up on the display.  
5
6
The display showing the “Disk Format” menu appears.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to escape from  
the SETUP mode.  
The Normal Screen appears indicating the beginning  
of the program (P01) that is automatically created after  
formatting the hard disk.  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
2
The drive selection display appears.  
IDE” will be flashed.  
Flashing  
<Normal Screen>  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key where the “IDE” is flashed.  
3
The menu to select the format type appears.  
****” represents the name of the drive.  
<CAUTION>  
Either the “Standard” or “Quick” format type can  
be selected. However, make sure that the  
“Standard” format type is selected when  
formatting a newly installed hard disk.  
Flashing  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key where the “Standard” is  
4
flashed.  
The format type selected is set and “Sure?” flashes.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Recording/Playback  
Basic Recording and Playback  
This chapter describes the basics of recording and playback audio using the VF08.  
Connections of external equipment  
You can connect various sound sources and external devices to the input and output connectors of the VF08 as  
shown in the example below. When making connection, make sure that the [MASTER] fader is set to the lowest  
(“”) position and the [PHONES] knob to the leftmost (“MIN”) position. Otherwise, your speakers or headphones  
may damage by the audio noise generated when connecting cables.  
Headphones  
Amplifier + Speakers etc.  
Microphones (Dynamic  
or condenser type)  
Foot switch (mode 8051)  
P
ST OUT  
FW  
L
<Note>  
You cannot use both the [BAL] and  
[UNBAL] connectors on INPUT A and  
INPUTBsimultaneously. Pluggingthe  
[UNBAL] connector disconnects the  
[BAL] connector.  
MIX PARAMETER  
TRACK  
EDIT  
SCENE  
SCENE SEQ.  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
U
TRIM  
TRIM  
ON/OFF  
ACCESS  
BOUNCE MODE  
2TRK MODE  
TRAINING  
MASTERING  
N/OFF  
/OFF  
PEAK  
PEAK  
PHANTOM  
F1  
F2  
F3  
Top panel  
Guitar processor  
Electric guitar  
Electric bass  
POWER  
PHANTOM  
ON OFF  
S/P DIF  
OUTPUT  
/
DATA  
INPUT  
MIDI  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
Rear panel  
AC outlet  
Digital equipment (CD, MD, DAT etc.)  
Sequencer  
PC w/sequence software  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Recording/Playback  
Switching the time base  
Each press of the [TIME BASE SEL] key cycles the time  
base of the Normal screen between “ABS”, “BAR/BEAT/  
CLK” and “MTC”.  
LCD  
This section describes major contents on the LCD  
display and their operations.  
Display when turning on the power  
When turning on the power of the VF08 on which a  
formatted hard disk is installed, the unit starts up and  
Initial..” and “version number” appears on the LCD  
display, followed by “Current Dr”, “IDE”, “hard disk name  
(momentarily)” and “record mode (Standard or  
Quick)”. Then the unit gets ready at the beginning  
(ABS 0) of the program which was selected when the  
power was turned off last time. The current position  
is shown by the time base previously selected.  
The display that appears when the unit gets ready is  
call “Normal screen”. The Normal screen shows the fol-  
lowing items.  
Normal screen with ABS time base  
Normal screen with BAR/BEAT/CLK time base  
Screen example while starting up  
Normal screen with MTC time base  
3
4
Normal screen  
“Disk remain” indication  
You can check the disk remaining space which shows  
the “recordable space left on the current disk”.  
The disk remaining space (REM) is shown during “Rec  
ready” or “Recording”, in “time” when the remaining  
time is less than 100 hours, or in “MB (Megabyte)” of  
the remaining space when it exceeds 100 hours. Note  
that the remaining time is shown as the recordable  
time when you record onto a single track. , you can  
calculate the recordable time for recording onto 8  
tracks by dividing the displayed remaining time by  
8.  
2
1
5
6
1. Scene number & name  
With the initial setting, “S00: Initial Mix” appears.  
2. Program number & name  
With the initial setting, “P01: #0001” (#0001 is a tentative  
name) appears.  
3. Mark number & name  
With the initial setting, “00: ABS 0” appears, showing that  
thecurrentlocationisatthebeginningoftheprogram. When  
the recorder starts running, “:” between the number and  
name is replaced with “+”.  
Remaining time displayed in time  
4. Time base  
With the initial setting, the ABS time base is selected.  
You can change the time base by using the [TIME BASE SEL]  
key (see the next section).  
5. Level meters for Tracks 1 through 8  
Remaining time displayed in MB  
6. Master level meters for the Stereo output (L, R)  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Recording/Playback  
Preliminary knowledge  
• Inputs and tracks  
You can record onto adjacent two tracks (Tracks 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, or 7-8) or a mono track (one of Tracks 1 through  
6). You cannot select another combination.  
The input signal from INPUT A is fed to odd tracks (1, 3, 5 and 7), while the input signal from INPUT B is fed to  
even tracks (2, 4, 6 and 8).  
PEAK  
TRACK STATUS  
/ TRACK SEL  
HARD DISK  
TRACK 1  
CH ON/OFF  
BALANCE  
INPUT A  
TRIM  
TRACK 2  
TRACK 3  
TRACK 4  
TRACK 5  
UNBALANCE  
TRACK 6  
TRACK 7  
TRACK 8  
CH ON/OFF  
BALANCE  
INPUT B  
TRIM  
PEAK  
UNBALANCE  
<Balanced (XLR) and unbalanced (phone) input connectors>  
Both the balanced and unbalanced input connectors are provided for INPUT A and INPUT B, allowing connec-  
tion of balanced and unbalanced devices. In addition, the phantom (DC 48 V) power can be supplied to the  
balanced XLR inputs, so you can use condenser microphones that need the phantom power (see the following  
section about how to use condenser microphones).  
<Note>  
You cannot use both the balanced and unbalanced inputs simultaneously.  
When plugging the unbalanced (phone) input connector, the balanced (XLR) input connector is disconnected.  
• How to use condenser microphones  
When connecting a condenser microphone that needs the phantom power, set the [PHANTOM] switch on the rear  
panel to “ON”. Read the following notes carefully before using the phantom power.  
<Notes for using the phantom power>  
• Be sure to keep the following notes.  
* When connecting a condenser microphone to the balanced input  
connector of the VF08, check whether or not the microphone needs  
the phantom power (+48 V).  
POWER  
PHANTOM  
ON OFF  
S/P DIF / DATA  
OUTPUT INPUT  
* Switch the [PHANTOM] switch to ON after connecting a microphone.  
* When switching the [PHANTOM] switch, or when plugging or  
unplugging a microphone, mute the VF08 output signals.  
* When connecting a dynamic microphone to the balanced input  
connector, set the [PHANTOM] switch to OFF. Otherwise, the  
microphone may damage.  
[PHANTOM] switch  
• You cannot use the phantom power for following microphones.  
* microphones with the unbalanced output  
* high impedance microphones  
<Important notes for on/off switching>  
Note that the VF08 power must be ON when  
changing the [PHANTOM] switch setting.  
Also note that the [PHANTOM] switch should be  
set to “OFF” after using the phantom power.  
* microphones with the XLR connectors that leaks a signal between  
pin #2 and pin #1 or pin #3 and pin #1  
* microphones with the center tapout type ground such as old-  
fashioned ribbon microphones  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Recording/Playback  
Basic recording (recording onto a single track)  
At first, let’s record a single sound source onto a single track to know the basic recording procedure of the VF08.  
There are 8 recording tracks (Tracks 1 through 8) and you can record onto any desired track(s).  
In the following example, we are going to record an electric guitar (with an effect unit) onto Track 1.  
Before starting, set all the track faders (1 through 6 and 7-8) and the master fader to the lowest position (-), and  
the [TRIM] knob to the leftmost position (LINE).  
6
2
INPUT  
BAL  
A
ST OUT  
FOOT SW  
PHES  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
L
R
1
MIX PARAMETER  
TRACK  
EDIT  
SCENE  
SCENE SEQ.  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
ON/OFF  
ACCESS  
BOUNCE MODE  
2TRK MODE  
MASTERING  
TRAINING  
CH ON/OFF  
CH ON/OFF  
PEAK  
PEAK  
PHANTOM  
F1  
F2  
F3  
6
RED  
REC  
GREEN  
OFF  
PLAY  
MUTE  
TRACK STATUS  
STATUS  
/SEL  
TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL  
JOG SHUTTLE  
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7/8 2TRK  
CURSOR  
MASTER  
EXIT  
/NO  
EJECT  
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
ENTER  
/YES  
0
0
4
TIMEBASE  
UNDO  
/REDO  
SETUP  
F1  
SEL  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F3  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F2  
SHIFT  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
LOCATE  
8
WAVE FORM  
SCRUB  
AUTO  
PUNCH  
VARI  
PITCH  
LOOP  
EDIT  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
EDIT  
MARK  
DELETE  
EDIT  
11  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
-  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
LOCATE ABS  
0
LOCATE REC END  
4
5
9
7 10  
Raise both the track 1 fader and master fader to “0” po-  
sition.  
4
Preparation for recording  
This is preparation for monitoring sound. If both of  
these faders are set at the minimum position, no sound  
can be monitored.  
Connect the [INPUT A] UNBAL jack to the output of the  
effect unit whose input is connected to a guitar.  
To record onto Track 1, 3, 5 or 7, use INPUT A.  
1
<Note>  
Connect the [PHONES] jack to headphones for moni-  
toring.  
2
3
The track 1 fader can be used for adjusting the moni-  
tor level without affecting the recording level. To  
adjust the recording level, use the [TRIM] knob of  
INPUT A.  
Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of Track  
1.  
The key lighting in green changes to flashing in red,  
showing Track 1 is now armed. (The “Remain” time is  
shown on the screen.)  
The [CH ON/OFF] key of INPUT A automatically lights.  
In this condition, by pressing the [CH ON/OFF] key of IN-  
PUT A, INPUT A can be muted.  
Press the [RECORD] key.  
The key starts flashing in red, while Track 1 (which is  
armed) changes to the input monitor mode.  
5
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Recording/Playback  
Use the [TRIM] knob of INPUT A while playing the gui-  
tar to get proper gain.  
Set the gain at maximum within the range in which the  
[PEAK] indicator does not turn on when playing the  
guitar at the loudest volume.  
6
<Unarming a track>  
To unarm a track, press the flashing [TRACK STA-  
TUS/TRACK SEL] key twice. The key changes to light  
in green.  
You can monitor both the input level of Track 1 and the  
stereo (L & R) output level from the bar-graph meters  
on the screen.  
Now you have recorded a sound source onto a track.  
Playback  
Press the [REWIND] key while holding down the [STOP]  
10  
key to locate “ABS 0”.  
Press the [PLAY] key to start playback.  
11  
You can control the playback level by the track 1 fader.  
If you find that the recording was not successfully made,  
use the undo/redo function and try recording again.  
<Note>  
Set the gain not to light the [PEAK] indicator when  
playing the guitar at the loudest volume.  
When the [PEAK] indicator lights, the input level is  
too high and the sound may be distorted or digital  
noise may be generated.  
<Track muting >  
Theplaybacklevelofeachrecordedtrackcanbecon-  
trolled using the corresponding track fader.  
You can mute the playback track by pressing the cor-  
responding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key except  
in the mix parameter edit mode.  
In the condition above, if you turn the [PHONES] knob  
clockwise, you can monitor the sound from the head-  
phones.  
<Warning!>  
Becarefulnottoexcessivelyraisethe[PHONE] volume.  
Prolonged exposure to loud sounds may have an  
adverse effect on hearing.  
Undo/Redo  
After finishing a recording, pressing the [UNDO/  
REDO] key returns to the condition just before re-  
cording (Undo).  
If you press the [UNDO/REDO] key again, you can  
cancel the Undo operation and return back to the  
condition after recording.  
Recording  
Press the [REWIND] key while holding down the [STOP]  
key to locate “ABS 0”.  
If the current recorder position is “ABS 0”, you can skip  
the operation above.  
7
8
[UNDO/REDO] key  
Press the [PLAY] key while holding down the [RECORD]  
key to start recording.  
The [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of Track 1 and the  
[RECORD] key light on, showing the VF08 is now record-  
ing.  
TIMEBASE  
SETUP  
F1  
UNDO / REDO  
F3  
SEL  
F2  
SHIFT  
LOCATE  
WAVE FORM  
SCRUB  
AUTO  
VARI  
PUNCH I/O  
LOOP  
EDIT  
PITCH  
EDIT  
MARK  
DELETE  
F FWD  
EDIT  
The VF08 uses the direct recording method. In this  
method, a digital signal just after the A/D conversion is  
directly recorded onto a track, without being routed to  
extra algorithms such as EQ.  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
LOCATE ABS 0  
LOCATE REC END  
You can add reverb or equalize the sound during  
mixdown.  
<Note>  
The undo/redo function is available to any recording,  
however, if you carry out any of the following operations  
after recording, you cannot use the undo/redo function.  
Therefore, if you are not satisfied with the recording,  
press the [UNDO/REDO] key immediately to undo the  
recording and make recording again.  
When the recorder starts running, the mark number and name  
shown on the top line of the screen changes as below, showing  
that the current position is ahead of “ABS 0” point.  
* Making a new recording  
* Making a new editing (copy, move, erase, auto punch  
in/out, etc.)  
* Turning off the power  
* Executing program select, rename, and deleting  
* Executing drive selection  
To stop recording, press the [STOP] key.  
After showing “Please Wait!”, the LCD returns to the Nor-  
mal screen.  
9
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Recording/Playback  
Basic recording (recording onto two tracks)  
After recording onto track 1 as described in the previous section, let’s make recording of a stereo sound source  
onto tracks 3 and 4.  
Stereo source  
1
INPUT A  
BAL  
ST OUT  
FOOT SW  
PHES  
INPUT B  
BAL  
L
R
MIX PARAMETER  
TRACK  
EDIT  
SCENE  
SCENE SEQ.  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
ON/OFF  
ACCESS  
BOUNCE MODE  
2TRK MODE  
MASTERING  
TRAINING  
CH ON/OFF  
CH ON/OFF  
PEAK  
PEAK  
PHANTOM  
F1  
F2  
F3  
5
2
RED  
REC  
GREEN  
OFF  
PLAY  
MUTE  
TRACK STATUS  
STATUS  
/SEL  
TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL  
JOG SHUTTLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7/8 2TRK  
CURSOR  
MASTER  
EXIT  
/NO  
EJECT  
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
ENTER  
/YES  
0
0
TIMEBASE  
UNDO  
/REDO  
SETUP  
F1  
SEL  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F3  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F2  
SHIFT  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
3
LOCATE  
7
WAVE FORM  
SCRUB  
AUTO  
PUNCH  
VARI  
LOOP  
EDIT  
PITCH  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
EDIT  
MARK  
DELETE  
EDIT  
10  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
-  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
LOCATE ABS  
0
LOCATE REC END  
7
3
4
8
6 9  
Press the [RECORD] key.  
4
5
Preparation for recording  
The [RECORD] key starts flashing in red, while Tracks 3  
and 4 (which are armed) changes to the input monitor  
mode.  
Connect the [INPUT A] UNBAL and [INPUT B] UNBAL  
jacks to the L and R outputs of the stereo source re-  
spectively.  
1
2
Use the [TRIM] knobs of INPUT A and B while playing  
the stereo source to get proper gain.  
Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys of Tracks  
3 and 4.  
Set the gain at maximum within the range in which the  
[PEAK] indicator does not turn on.  
You can monitor both the input level of Tracks 3 and 4  
from the bar-graph meters on the screen.  
The keys lighting in green change to flashing in red,  
showing Tracks 3 and 4 are now armed. (The “Remain”  
time is shown on the screen.)  
The [CH ON/OFF] keys of INPUT A and B automatically  
light in green.  
Raise the faders of tracks 3 and 4 and [MASTER] fader  
to “0” position.  
3
This is preparation for monitoring sound. If both of  
these faders are set at the minimum position, no sound  
can be monitored.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Recording/Playback  
<Note>  
Playback  
Set the gain not to light the [PEAK] indicator.  
When the [PEAK] indicator lights, the input level is  
too high and the sound may be distorted or digital  
noise may be generated.  
Locate the desired position (time) for playback.  
9
Press the [PLAY] key to start playback.  
You can control track playback levels by using the cor-  
responding track faders.  
10  
In the condition above, if you turn the [PHONES] knob  
clockwise, you can monitor the sound from the head-  
phones.  
Ifyoufindthattherecordingwasnotsuccessfullymade,  
use the undo/redo function and try recording again.  
<Warning!>  
Be careful not to excessively raise the [PHONE] vol-  
ume. Prolonged exposure to loud sounds may have  
an adverse effect on hearing.  
<Track muting>  
Theplaybacklevelofeachrecordedtrackcanbecon-  
trolled using the corresponding track fader.  
You can mute the playback tracks by pressing the  
corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys  
except in the mix parameter edit mode.  
Recording  
Locate the start position (time) for recording.  
6
7
<How to use recording tracks effectively>  
The VF08 has 8 recordable tracks.  
Press the [PLAY] key while holding down the [RECORD]  
key to start recording.  
If you record materials onto all 8 tracks according  
to the procedures described in “Basic recording”,  
you cannot record further materials.  
To record more materials, you can use the “track  
bounce” technique to save tracks as follows:  
The [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys of Tracks 3 and 4,  
as well as the [RECORD] key light on, showing the VF08  
is now recording.  
You can see the meter for Track 1 also moving. By rais-  
ing the Track 1 fader, you can make overdubbing onto  
tracks 3 and 4 while listening to playback of track 1.  
1. Record materials onto tracks 1 through 6.  
2. Mix the signals recorded on tracks 1 through  
6andrecordthemixedsignalontotracks7and  
8.  
Then tracks 1 through 6 can be used to record  
other materials.  
This is the basic technique used for Multitrackers.  
We recommend that tracks 7 and 8 are basically  
used as the destination tracks of “track bounce”  
from tracks 1 through 6.  
See “Advanced Operation” for details about the track  
bounce technique.  
When the recorder starts running, the mark number  
and name shown on the top line of the screen changes  
as below, showing that the current position is ahead  
of “ABS 0” point.  
In addition, tracks 7 and 8 play an important role  
in “training mode” and “mastering mode” described  
later in “Advanced functions”.  
The VF08 also provides the “track exchange” func-  
tion which allows you to keep recordable tracks.  
The VF08 has 16 additional tracks for each pro-  
gram, in addition to 8 recordable (and playable)  
real tracks (1 through 8). The “track exchange”  
function allows you to exchange a real track and  
an additional track, making the real track empty.  
To stop recording, press the [STOP] key.  
After showing “Please Wait!”, the LCD returns to the Nor-  
mal screen.  
8
See page 51 “Recorder functions.”  
<Unarming tracks>  
To unarm tracks now recorded, press the flashing  
[TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys again. The keys  
changes to light in green.  
Nowyouhaverecordedastereosourceontotwotracks  
(3 and 4).  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Recording/Playback  
Mark function  
The VF08 has the Mark function which allows you to set marks at the desired positions in a song.  
Youcanlocateamarkpositionimmediately, aswellasusemarkpositionsforthepunchinand outpoints, beginning  
and end points for repeat and editing points for track editing such as copy, move, erase, etc.  
This section describes how to set, delete and locate a mark. For details about editing a mark, see “Recorder func-  
tions” described later.  
Setting a mark on the fly  
Locating a mark  
In the initial condition, Mark 00 is automatically en-  
tered at the beginning of the current program (ABS  
0) and named “ABS 0”.  
You can locate a mark using the [|<<] or [>>|] key.  
Current position  
You can enter up to 99 marks (Mark 01 through 99).  
Mark number and name are shown on the Normal  
screen as the arrow points in the screen example be-  
low. (You cannot edit or delete Mark 00.)  
[
I] key  
[I  
] key  
• Pressing [|<<] key locates the previous mark.  
In the example above, each time you press the key from  
the current position, the recorder will locate Mark 03 ->  
02 -> 01 -> 00.  
• Pressing [>>|] key locates the next mark.  
In the example above, each time you press the key from  
the current position, the recorder will locate Mark 04 ->  
05 -> 06.  
During playback (or while stopped), press [|<< / MARK]  
1
key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
Entry Mark” is shown briefly and a mark is entered at  
the current position.  
Also the time marked is entered in the mark map list  
(see “Recorder functions” for details).  
The current (located) mark number is shown on the  
Normal screen.  
To enter another mark, repeat step 1) above.  
2
<Note>  
Marks are assigned in ascending order of ABS time.  
For example, even if you enter marks in order as shown  
in the upper diagram below, the mark numbers are as-  
signed as shown in the lower diagram.  
Deleting a mark  
You can delete unnecessary mark  
While stopped, locate the mark to be deleted using the  
1
[|<<] or [>>|] key.  
The mark to be deleted is shown on the screen.  
Press the [>>|/DELETE] key while holding down the  
2
[SHIFT] key.  
A pop-up panel asking for confirmation to delete the  
current mark appears, in which “Sure?” blinks.  
To cancel the operation for deletion, press the [EXIT/  
NO] key.  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key while holding down the  
3
[RECORD] key.  
The current mark is deleted.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Recording/Playback  
ABS locate functions  
There are four types of the ABS locate functions as below.  
• Pressing the [REWIND] key while holding down the [STOP] key locates the beginning of the current program  
(ABS 00), regardless of the time base setting.  
• Pressing the [F FWD] key while holding down the [STOP] key locates the end position of the last recording of the  
current program (REC END).  
You can use this function to locate the end point of a song or to check the length of a song.  
• Pressing the [PLAY] key while holding down the [STOP] key locates the beginning of the last playback.  
• Pressing the [RECORD] key while holding down the [STOP] key locates the beginning of the last recording.  
Punch in/out  
If you are not satisfied with your recording and want to modify only a specific part, you can replace the part with  
a new recording using the punch in/out technique.  
Punch in” switches the transport mode from playback to recording, while “Punch out” switches the transport  
mode from recording to playback. The point at which a punch in is carried out is called a “punch in point”, while  
the point at which a punch out is carried out is called a “punch out point.”  
You can carry out the punch in/out operation in 3 ways:  
* Manual punch in/out using the keys on the unit  
* Using the foot switch (Model 8051)  
* Auto punch in/out function  
After setting the punch in and out points, the punch in/out can be took place automatically.  
The following description is assumed that the track(s)  
Punch in/out using the foot switch  
to be punched in/out are armed and the source input  
level is set appropriately by using the [TRIM] knob.  
Connect the Model 8051 foot switch to the [FOOT SW]  
jack.  
1
FOOT SW (Model 8051)  
Manual punch in/out using the keys on the unit  
Start playback by pressing the [PLAY] key from a po-  
1
[FOOT SW] jack  
sition before the punch in point.  
When the playback position reaches the punch in point,  
2
INPUT  
BAL  
A
PHONES  
ST OUT  
FW  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
press the [RECORD] key while holding down the [PLAY]  
L
R
key.  
MIX PARAMETER  
TRACK  
EDIT  
SCENE  
SCENE SEQ.  
Onlythearmedtrack(s)switchfromplaybacktorecord-  
ing.  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
ON/OFF  
ACCESS  
BOUNCE MODE  
2TRK MODE  
TRAINING  
MASTERING  
CH ON/OFF  
CH ON/OFF  
PEAK  
PEAK  
F1  
F2  
F3  
PHANTOM  
At the punch out point, press the [PLAY] key .  
3
The armed track(s) switch from recording to playback.  
Start playback by pressing the [PLAY] key from a po-  
sition before the punch in point.  
2
3
When the playback position reaches the punch in point,  
step on the foot switch.  
Onlythearmedtrack(s)switchfromplaybacktorecord-  
ing.  
At the punch out point, step on the foot switch.  
The armed track(s) switch from recording to playback.  
4
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Recording/Playback  
• Setting the punch in/out points numerically  
While the recorder is stopped, you can set the in and  
out points by entering the time numerically.  
Auto punch in/out function  
You must set the punch in and out points before per-  
forming auto punch in/out recording.  
You can set the points either during playback and  
whilestopped. Inthefollowingdescription,weassume  
that the “ABS” time base is selected.  
While stopped, press the [AUTO PUNCH/EDIT] key  
1
while holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
The screen for setting the punch in/out points appears.  
• Setting the punch in/out points on the fly during playback  
(or while stopped)  
Press the [AUTO PUNCH/EDIT] key while holding down  
1
the [SHIFT] key.  
The screen for setting the punch in/out points appears.  
During playback, this counter shows the current  
recorder position in real time.  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key while the punch in point  
2
value is highlighted on the screen as above.  
Now you can edit the punch in point value.  
Initially, the “seconds” value starts blinking, showing  
that it can be edited.  
At the point at which you want to set the punch in point,  
2
press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the  
[SHIFT] key.  
In Point Stored!” appears briefly, and the point is stored  
as the punch in point.  
Flashing  
Move the blinking value by using the [CURSOR </>] key  
3
and enter the desired value using the [JOG] dial.  
After completing editing the time value, press the [EN-  
4
TER/YES] key.  
The edited time is stored as the punch in point.  
Use the [CURSOR down] key to highlight the punch out  
5
point value, and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
Now you can edit the punch out point value.  
The time (or bar/beat) stored is shown here.  
At the point at which you want to set the punch out point,  
3
press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down  
the [SHIFT] key.  
Out Point Stored!” appears briefly, and the point at which  
you carry out the operation above is stored as the punch  
out point.  
Flashing  
Enter the desired value with the same method as en-  
6
tering the punch in point, then press the [ENTER/YES]  
key.  
The edited time is stored as the punch out point.  
The time (or bar/beat) stored is shown here.  
After storing times for both points, press the [EXIT/NO]  
7
key.  
<Note>  
The LCD returns to the Normal screen.  
Set the punch in point earlier than the punch out point.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Recording/Playback  
• Performing auto punch in/out recording  
Taking a mark point in the punch in or punch out point  
After storing the punch in and out points, you can  
perform the auto punch in/out recording.  
You can take a mark point in the punch in or out point.  
<Note>  
Press the [AUTO PUNCH /EDIT] key (to illuminate the  
1
The following operation is possible only when any marks  
are stored using the Mark function described earlier.  
key).  
The auto punch mode is now active.  
2
Locate the earlier position to the punch in point.  
Press the [AUTO PUNCH/EDIT] key while holding down  
1
the [SHIFT] key.  
The screen for setting the punch in/out points appears.  
3
Press the [RECORD] key while holding down the  
[PLAY] key.  
A “take” of auto punch in/out recording starts and  
“TAKE” lights up on the screen.  
The recorder starts playback, and then automatically  
puts into the record mode at the punch in point. It  
automatically switches to playback at the punch out  
point.  
<Rehearsal>  
Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key when the in point time  
2
In the step 3) above, if you press only the [PLAY]  
key, a “rehearsal” of auto punch in/out recording  
starts and “RHSL” lights up on the screen.  
In the rehearsal mode, when the recorder reaches  
the punch in point, only the monitor of the armed  
track(s) switches to “Input monitor” without perform-  
ing actual recording.  
value is highlighted (as above).  
The highlighted line changes to show a mark.  
You can rehearse as many times as you like before  
actual recording.  
Hint:  
If you use the loop function together with the re-  
hearsal mode, you can rehearse your playing re-  
peatedly without the need of the recorder opera-  
tion, allowing you to concentrate on your playing.  
See “Recorder functions” for details about the loop  
function.  
Showing a mark.  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
3
The highlighted mark starts blinking.  
Blinking  
Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired mark, and then  
4
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The selected mark position is taken in the punch  
in point.  
Use the [CURSOR down] key to highlight the punch out  
5
point value, and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired mark, and then  
6
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The selected mark position is taken in the punch out  
point.  
After setting both points, press the [EXIT/NO] key.  
7
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Recording/Playback  
Mixing  
After recording all tracks (1 through 8), you can tailor the sound of each track. The following describes about  
settings for level, pan, EQ and effects.  
Set the pan position using the [JOG] dial.  
The pan icon on the screen changes in real time accord-  
Adjusting levels  
3
Adjust the playback level of each track using the cor-  
ing to the rotation of the [JOG] dial.  
1
responding fader (1 through 6 and 7/8).  
The levels of tracks 7 and 8 are simultaneously con-  
trolled by a single fader (7/8).  
Repeat steps 2) and 3) to set other tracks.  
4
5
After completing the pan setting, press the [EXIT/NO]  
key.  
The LCD returns to the Normal screen.  
Adjust the stereo master output (ST OUT L/R) levels  
using the [MASTER] fader.  
2
<About master output levels>  
Adjusting EQ  
You can view the stereo master output (L/R) levels  
from the L/R level meters on the screen. The output  
levels are affected by the [MASTER] fader position.  
Be sure not to set the fader level too high to avoid  
the sound distorted.  
Press the [EQ] key.  
The EQ screen is shown, where “Select TRK!” is blinking  
in the initial condition.  
1
MIX PARAMETER  
TRACK  
EDIT  
SCENE  
SCENE SEQ.  
Setting pan position  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
You can set the pan position of each track.  
ON/OFF  
BOUNCE MODE  
TRK MODE  
MANG  
TRAINING  
Press the [PAN] key.  
1
The pan setting screen is shown, where “Select TRK!” is  
blinking in the initial condition.  
[EQ] key  
MIX PARAMETER  
TRACK  
EDIT  
SCENE  
SCENE SEQ.  
Blinking  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
[PAN] key  
ON/OFF  
BOUNCE MODE  
2TRK MODE  
MASTERING  
TRAINING  
Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of the de-  
sired track.  
2
The default preset library entry (“L00: 2-SHLV”) is  
shown, in which the High Gain field is highlighted,  
showing that it can be edited.  
Blinking  
highlighted  
Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of the de-  
sired track (or use the [CURSOR </>] keys to select the  
2
desired track).  
The pan icon of the selected track is highlighted, show-  
ing that it is editable.  
<Selecting from the EQ library>:  
There are 36 presets besides the default preset in the  
EQ library. You can select a desired preset accord-  
ing to the situation and tailor the sound. See “Mixer  
functions” for details.  
highlighted  
Edit the “Hi Gain” value using the [JOG] dial.  
The EQ curve is shown according to the value setting,  
while the sound changes in real time.  
3
You can set the value between -18 dB and + 18 dB.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Recording/Playback  
Highlight the “Lo Gain” field by using the [CURSOR  
down] key, and edit the “Lo Gain” value using the [JOG]  
dial.  
You can set the value between -18 dB and + 18 dB, as  
same as the Hi Gain.  
Use the [JOG] dial to enter the send level.  
While the send level changes, the corresponding icon  
also changes in real time.  
When the value increases, the effect sound of the cur-  
rently selected effect type will be output.  
4
3
4
To set the effect send levels for other tracks, carry out  
step 2 and 3 above repeatedly.  
Repeat steps 2 through 4 to edit EQ on other tracks.  
5
6
After completing the EQ setting, press the [EXIT/NO]  
key.  
The LCD returns to the Normal screen.  
Effect type setting  
<Effect type setting>  
Setting effects  
The VF08 provides 38 effect types in the effect library.  
You can select any one of the types depending on the  
usage. See “Mixer functions” for details about the effect li-  
brary.  
This section describes how to set the effect send lev-  
els and how to select the effect type.  
You can also perform pre/post setting, effect param-  
eter setting, etc. See “Mixer Functions” described later  
for details.  
Bring up the effect type setting screen and select the  
2
desired effect type by rotating the [JOG] dial.  
While rotating the [JOG] dial, the effect type appears  
one after the other among 38 types.  
Press the [EFFECT] key.  
1
The effect send level setting screen appears initially.  
Each press of the [EFFECT] key switches between the  
effect send level setting screen, effect type selection  
screen and effect send pre/post selection screen.  
Highlighted  
MIX PARAMETER  
TRACK  
EDIT  
SCENE  
SCENE SEQ.  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
[EFFECT] key  
ON/OFF  
After selecting the desired effect type, press the [EN-  
3
BOUNCE MODE  
2TRK MODE  
MASTERING  
TRAINING  
TER/YES] key.  
The selected effect type is set.  
Press the [EFFECT] key to bring up the effect send level  
4
Blinking  
setting screen.  
Adjust the effect send levels as described above.  
5
<Pre/post setting of effect sends>  
All the effect sends from tracks 1 through 6 are  
initially set to “post-fader”. Therefore, when a  
track fader is completely down, no signal is sent  
evenifyouraisetheeffectsendlevelofthetrack.  
You can also select “pre-fader” if necessary.  
See “Mixer functions” for details.  
Effect send level setting  
While the effect send level setting screen is shown,  
press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of the  
2
desired track.  
The effect knob icon of the selected track is highlighted,  
showing that it can be edited.  
Thedefaultvaluefortracksends1through6is0while  
the default value for the master is “80”.  
<Parameter setting for each effect type>  
You can set parameters for the selected effect  
type. See Mixer functions” for details about pa-  
rameter setting.  
<On/Off setting of the effect>  
highlighted  
You can switch on or off the effect alternately  
by pressing the [EFFECT/ON/OFF] key while  
holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
See “Mixer functions” for details.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Recording/Playback  
Mixdown  
After tailoring sound of all the tracks, let’s make a master tape (disc) using your master recorder (cassette, DAT,  
MD, etc.). As the VF08 can feed the stereo outputs (L and R) via the S/PDIF (coaxial) digital output jack, you can  
make the master tape (disc) in digital domain if your recorder provides a digital input jack. If your digital re-  
corder only provides the optical input jack, use the Fostex COP-1 optical to coaxial converter.  
Digital mixdown  
<Using the mastering mode:>  
The VF08 provides the mastering mode. Using this mode,  
you can create a powerful master by recording the mixed-  
down signal on Tracks 7/8 onto an external master re-  
corder while applying the dedicated mastering effects to  
the signal.  
See “Advanced Operation” for details about the mastering  
mode.  
POWER  
PHANTOM  
ON OFF  
S/P DIF  
OUTPUT  
/
DATA  
INPUT  
MIDI  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
Analog mixdown  
Analog master recorder  
Digital master recorder  
Connect the [DATA OUTPUT] jack to the digital input  
jack of your master recorder.  
1
2
INPUT  
BAL  
A
PHONES  
ST OUT  
FOOT SW  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
MIX PARAMETER  
SCENE SEQ.  
TRACK  
EDIT  
SCENE  
Set the master recorder’s recording source to the digi-  
tal input.  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
ON/OFF  
ACCESS  
BOUNCE MODE  
2TRK MODE  
TRAINING  
• The sampling frequency of the VF08 is fixed to 44.1  
kHz, so you cannot record the VF08 digital output  
signal to the master recorder that cannot accept 44.1  
kHz digital signals.  
MASTERING  
CH ON/OFF  
CH ON/OFF  
PEAK  
PEAK  
PHANTOM  
F1  
F2  
F3  
Connect the [ST OUT - L/R] jacks to the input jacks of  
your analog master recorder.  
• In general, you cannot adjust the digital input level  
of a digital recorder.  
1
Adjust the stereo output level of the VF08 using the  
[MASTER] fader.  
Set the recording level of the master recorder.  
3
2
3
• In general, set the fader so that the level meter on the  
master recorder indicates “0” when the VF08 feeds  
the loudest level signal.  
Start recording the master recorder, and start playback  
of the VF08 from the beginning of the song.  
If the level is too high, the sound may be distorted.  
When recording finishes, stop both the units.  
4
Start recording the master recorder, and start playback  
of the VF08 from the beginning of the song.  
4
5
<Fade in/out:>  
You can fade in or fade out a song by using the [MASTER]  
fader.  
When recording finishes, stop both the units.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Functions  
Mixer Functions  
Initial condition when turning on the power  
When turning on the power, the VF08 starts up while showing the unit information on the LCD display and then  
gets ready when the screen below appears. This screen is called "Normal Screen", in which the program number  
and current recorder position are shown. In the following example (the default), Program 1 (P01) is loaded and  
the current position is the beginning (ABS 00M 00S).  
Normal screen  
INPUT  
BAL  
A
ST OUT  
FOOT SW  
PHONES  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
L
R
MIX PARAMETER  
TRACK  
EDIT  
SCENE  
SCENE SEQ.  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
ON/OFF  
ACCESS  
BOUNCE MODE  
2TRK MODE  
MASTERING  
TRAINING  
CH ON/OFF  
CH ON/OFF  
PEAK  
PEAK  
PHANTOM  
F1  
F2  
F3  
RED  
REC  
GREEN  
OFF  
PLAY  
MUTE  
TRACK STATUS  
STATUS  
/SEL  
Lighting in green  
TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL  
JOG SHUTTLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7/8 2TRK  
CURSOR  
MASTER  
EXIT  
/NO  
EJECT  
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
ENTER  
/YES  
0
0
TIMEBASE  
UNDO  
/REDO  
SETUP  
F1  
SEL  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F2  
F3  
SHIFT  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
LOCATE  
WAVE FORM  
SCRUB  
AUTO  
VARI  
PUNCH  
LOOP  
EDIT  
PITCH  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
EDIT  
MARK  
DELETE  
EDIT  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
-  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
LOCATE ABS  
0
LOCATE REC END  
Lighting in orange  
Operations while the Normal screen is shown  
Fader  
The [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key for the muted  
track is unlit. Pressing the key again releases muting  
and lights up the key.  
The fader for each track (1 through 6 and 7/8) con-  
trols the level of the playback signal fed to the stereo  
outputs.  
Master fader mute  
Track mute  
While the VF08 is not in the mix parameter edit mode,  
pressing the [STATUS/SEL] key for the master fader  
mutes the stereo outputs.  
While the stereo outputs are muted, the [STATUS/SEL]  
keyisunlit. Pressingthekeyagainreleasesmutingand  
lights up the key.  
While the VF08 is not in the mix parameter edit mode,  
pressing any one of the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL]  
keys (for tracks 1 through 6 and 7/8) mutes the cor-  
responding track.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Functions  
Mix parameter section  
The Mix parameter section provides five keys that are used for mixer function settings.  
By pressing one of these keys alone or while holding down the [SHIFT] key, you can execute the following.  
•Pan setting  
MIX PARAMETER  
•EQ setting  
SCENE  
SCENE SEQ.  
•Effect send level setting  
•Effect send pre/post setting  
•Effect type/parameter setting  
•Effect on/off setting  
•Save/load/delete of a scene memory  
•Scene sequence mode on/off setting  
•Mark map setting  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
PAN  
EFFECT  
•Fader view  
ON/OFF  
Adjusting pan positions  
You can adjust the pan position of each track signal fed to the stereo outputs.  
Use the [JOG] dial to adjust the pan position.  
The pan position is set according to the rotating degree.  
The following show examples of the pan settings.  
Press the [PAN] key.  
The pan screen appears.  
3
1
If you have not edited any track parameter for pan, EQ  
or effect send setting after turning on the power last  
time, the message prompting to select a track ("Select  
TRK!") blinks, as well as all the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK  
SEL] keys on the panel flash.  
If you have edited any track parameter for pan, EQ or  
effect send setting after turning on the power last time,  
the icon for the previously edited track is highlighted,  
showing that it can be edited.  
Pan position:  
center  
Pan position:  
hard right  
Pan position:  
hard left  
•Controllable tracks  
Tracks 1 through 6 and 7/8  
Blinking  
•Available values  
L10 (hard left) through C (center) to R10 (hard right)  
(the default setting: "C" for all tracks)  
To adjust the pan position for another track, repeat  
steps 2 and 3 above.  
4
5
Select the desired track by pressing the correspond-  
ing [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key (or using the  
After completing pan setting, press the [EXIT/NO] key.  
The VF08 exits the mix parameter edit mode and the  
LCD display returns to the Normal screen.  
2
[CURSOR </>] keys).  
The pan icon of the selected track is highlighted, indi-  
cating that you can edit it.  
The [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of the selected track  
flashes.  
Highlighted  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Functions  
Editing EQ  
The VF08 is equipped with 2-band (HI and LO) EQ for Tracks 1 through 6. 36 preset entries are available in the  
EQ library.  
<Note>  
Selectable from 36 preset library entries (L00  
through L36). The default is "L00: 2-SHLV.  
After selecting the desired library, press the [EN-  
TER/YES] key to confirm the setting.  
You can apply EQ only to Tracks 1 through 6. You cannot  
apply EQ to Tracks 7/8.  
Library  
Press the [EQ] key.  
1
*See the following table for details about the EQ  
library.  
The EQ screen appears.  
If you have not edited any track parameter for EQ, pan  
or effect send setting after turning on the power last  
time, the message prompting to select a track ("Select  
TRK!") blinks, as well as the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK  
SEL] keys for Tracks 1 through 6 on the panel flash.  
If you have edited any track parameter for pan, EQ or  
effect send setting after turning on the power last time,  
the icon for the previously edited track is highlighted,  
showing that it can be edited.  
Setting example 1: Set "Hi Gain" to "+11 dB."  
Thehighfrequencygainisboostedupasshowngraphi-  
cally.  
Blinking  
Setting example 2: Set "Lo Gain" to "-8 dB."  
The low frequency gain is cut as shown graphically.  
Select the desired track by pressing the correspond-  
2
ing [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key (or using the  
[CURSOR </>] keys).  
The selected track number and library entry name  
(shown as "EQ-1" and "L00:2-SHLV" respectively in the  
screen example below) are shown, together with the  
current settings. The gain value of Hi EQ ("Hi Gain")  
blinks, indicating that you can edit it.  
Setting example 3: Set "EQ library" to "L03."  
Thehighfrequencygainisboostedupasshowngraphi-  
cally.  
By using the [JOG] dial to select "L03": Ana.Kick" and  
pressing the [ENTER/YES] key, the preset parameter  
values are shown together with the corresponding EQ  
curve.  
Use the [CURSOR up/down] key to select a parameter  
3
You can edit parameters from this preset condition and  
store the setting as a scene. Note that if you turn off  
the power, the setting is cleared.  
to be edited.  
Eachtimeyoupressthe[CURSOR/down]key, theblink-  
ing parameter (to be edited) changes in the following  
order. Hi Gain -> Lo Gain -> EQ ON/OFF -> library en-  
try ->Hi Gain...  
Pressing the [CURSOR/up] key changes the blinking  
parameter in the reverse order.  
Use the [JOG] dial to edit the parameter value.  
4
The following values are available for each parameter.  
-18 dB through 0 dB to +18 dB in 1 dB steps.  
Hi Gain  
The current EQ curve is shown graphically accord-  
ing to the current values.  
To edit the EQ for another track, repeat steps 2 through  
4.  
5
6
-18 dB through 0 dB to +18 dB in 1 dB steps.  
The current EQ curve is shown graphically accord-  
ing to the current values.  
Lo Gain  
ON/OFF  
After completing EQ editing, press the [EXIT/NO] key.  
The VF08 exits the EQ edit mode and the LCD display  
returns to the Normal screen.  
ON or OFF of EQ  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Functions  
Preset entries in the EQ library  
LO  
HI  
LO  
HI  
-18.0  
L00: 2-SHLV  
L10: Lo-Fi_Cym  
Gain  
Freq.  
Q
0
0
+3.0  
Gain  
Freq.  
Q
Removes the brightness from a  
cymbal sound by cutting high fre-  
quencies.  
Flat setting  
The first time you bring up the EQ  
screen, this entry is selected.  
4kHz  
H-S  
8kHz  
H-S  
400Hz  
L-S  
300Hz  
1.6  
LO  
HI  
L11: Perc.  
LO  
HI  
L01: LightKick  
+7.0  
6kHz  
H-S  
Gain -4.0  
-12.0  
600Hz  
5.0  
Gain +6.0  
Creates a bright sound by empha-  
sizing the attack of a conga, bongo,  
etc.  
Creates a light and jaunty kick  
sound  
Freq.  
Q
100Hz  
L-S  
Freq.  
Q
400Hz  
L-S  
LO  
HI  
L12:Tamb.  
LO  
HI  
L02:TightKick  
+10.0  
5.4kHz  
H-S  
Gain -8.0  
+10.0  
4kHz  
8.0  
Gain +7.0  
Creates a subtle sound by empha-  
sizingthepresenceofatambourine,  
etc.  
Creates a tight and hard kick sound.  
Freq.  
Q
360Hz  
L-S  
Freq.  
Q
400Hz  
L-S  
LO  
HI  
L13: Fat_Bass  
LO  
HI  
L03: Ana.Kick  
+3.0  
2.4kHz  
6.3  
Gain +5.0  
-9.0  
6kHz  
H-S  
Gain +5.0  
Creates a fat base sound by slightly  
boosting the low frequency range.  
Makesananalogkicksoundboomy.  
Freq.  
Q
100Hz  
0.1  
Freq.  
Q
550Hz  
L-S  
LO  
HI  
L14: Norm.Bass  
LO  
HI  
L04: Snappy_SD  
+4.0  
2.4kHz  
1.0  
Gain +5.0  
+6.0  
3.5kHz  
2.5  
Gain -7.0  
Creates a all-round bass sound.  
Makes a snare sound snappier.  
Freq.  
Q
190Hz  
1.0  
Freq.  
Q
1kHz  
L-S  
LO  
HI  
L15: Loud_Bass  
LO  
HI  
L05: Power_SD  
+3.0  
1.3kHz  
2.2  
Gain +4.0  
+5.0  
3.5kHz  
2.5  
Gain +8.0  
Creates a good analog bass sound  
byboostingthelowfrequencyrange  
and emphasizing the attack.  
Createsapowerfulandheavysnare  
sound.  
Freq.  
Q
120Hz  
2.0  
Freq.  
Q
150Hz  
4.5  
LO  
HI  
LO  
HI  
L16: Bright_Pf  
L06: Deep_SD  
+4.0  
5kHz  
H-S  
Gain -3.0  
+4.0  
4.3kHz  
2.2  
Gain +3.0  
Creates a bright piano sound.  
Creates a heavy sound of a snare  
drum with a deep body.  
Freq.  
Q
340Hz  
0.9  
Freq.  
Q
550Hz  
4.5  
LO  
HI  
L17: Loud_Pf  
LO  
HI  
L07:Talk_Tom  
-3.0  
Gain +5.0  
+7.0  
3.2kHz  
6.3  
Gain +4.0  
Creates a rich piano sound by  
boosting the low frequency range  
which contains rich harmonics.  
Creates a skinny tom-tom sound.  
1.3kHz  
0.9  
Freq.  
Q
200Hz  
L-S  
Freq.  
Q
100Hz  
7.1  
LO  
HI  
L08: Melo.Tom  
LO  
Gain -13.0  
HI  
L18: Power_Pf  
-12.0  
1.7kHz  
2.2  
Gain +6.0  
+7.0  
5.4kHz  
1.1  
Creates a melodious sound.  
Creates a tight and smooth sound.  
Suitable for a piano solo.  
Freq.  
Q
100Hz  
2.8  
Freq.  
Q
170Hz  
0.7  
LO  
Gain -10.0  
HI  
LO  
HI  
L09:W.GongTom  
L19: E.Pf  
+17.0  
520Hz  
7.1  
+3.0  
6.4kHz  
1.7  
Gain +8.0  
Createsasoundwhichemphasizes  
the attack and distortion when hit-  
ting keyboards of an electric piano.  
Makes a tom-tom sound woody.  
Freq.  
Q
130Hz  
L-S  
Freq.  
Q
1kHz  
0.7  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Functions  
LO  
HI  
+3.0  
L30: Male_Vo  
LO  
HI  
+4.0  
L20: Clean_EG  
Gain +2.0  
Gain -4.0  
Adds a bright character to a trans-  
parent and clean electric guitar  
sound.  
Effective for a male vocal  
6.2kHz  
H-S  
Freq.  
Q
2kHz  
0.5  
6.6kHz  
H-S  
Freq.  
Q
100Hz  
L-S  
LO  
HI  
L31: Female_Vo  
LO  
HI  
L21: CrunCh_EG  
+4.0  
Gain -5.0  
+6.0  
4kHz  
1.4  
Gain -2.0  
Makes a moderately distorted  
crunchelectricguitarsound distinc-  
tive.  
Effective for a female vocal  
5.8kHz  
H-S  
Freq.  
Q
170Hz  
0.7  
Freq.  
Q
120Hz  
0.7  
LO  
HI  
L32: Chorus  
LO  
HI  
L22: OverDrvEG  
+5.0  
10kHz  
H-S  
Gain -5.0  
Effective for a whole chorus part by  
emphasizing the high frequency  
range.  
+7.0  
1.3kHz  
1.1  
Gain +6.0  
Makes a mellow overdriven electric  
guitar sound fatter.  
Freq.  
Q
120Hz  
0.7  
Freq.  
Q
310Hz  
1.5  
LO  
HI  
L33: SpeeCh  
LO  
HI  
L23: Dist.EG  
+3.0  
10kHz  
H-S  
Gain ON  
Makes a narration clear.  
+4.0  
3.6kHz  
10  
Gain +6.0  
Makes a hardly distorted electric  
guitar sound distinctive.  
Freq.  
Q
180Hz  
HPF  
Freq.  
Q
370Hz  
L-S  
LO  
HI  
L34: Digi.Mix  
LO  
HI  
L24: Metal_EG  
+6.0  
12kHz  
H-S  
Gain +5.0  
Makes an analog open-reel or cas-  
sette tape sound closer to a digital Freq.  
sound.  
+12.0  
14kHz  
H-S  
Gain +3.0  
Makes a high-gain metal sound dis-  
tinctive.  
100Hz  
L-S  
Freq.  
Q
230Hz  
0.7  
Q
LO  
HI  
L35: AnalogMix  
LO  
HI  
L25: Stroke_AG  
ON  
Gain ON  
Cuts the high frequency range and  
provides an opposite character to  
L34.  
+8.0  
9kHz  
1.2  
Gain -9.0  
Suppresses a hole resonance of an  
acoustic guitar and makes a code  
stroke sound powerful.  
8kHz  
LPF  
Freq.  
Q
250Hz  
HPF  
Freq.  
Q
100Hz  
0.7  
LO  
HI  
L36:Telephone  
LO  
HI  
L26: Arpeg.EAG  
ON  
Gain ON  
+3.0  
9.4kHz  
0.1  
Gain -2.0  
Emphasizes the mid range only to  
provideatelephonereceiversound.  
Controls the arpeggio code balance  
of an electro-acoustic guitar.  
5.6kHz  
LPF  
Freq.  
Q
1.2kHz  
HPF  
Freq.  
Q
210Hz  
L-S  
LO  
HI  
L27: Arpeg.AG  
+5.0  
Gain -7.0  
Suppresses a hole resonance of an  
acoustic guitar and makes an ar-  
peggio brighter.  
4.4kHz  
H-S  
Freq.  
Q
530Hz  
7.1  
LO  
HI  
L28: Brass_Sec  
+4.0  
5.6kHz  
5.0  
Gain -3.0  
Controlsthebalanceofbrassinstru-  
ments (such as trumpets, trom-  
bones. etc.).  
Freq.  
Q
100Hz  
2.5  
LO  
HI  
L29:W.WindSec  
+4.0  
260Hz  
2.2  
Gain +3.0  
Makes the mid frequency range of  
woodwind instruments (such as  
clarinets, oboe, etc.) richer.  
Freq.  
Q
125Hz  
L-S  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Functions  
Editing Effects  
This section describes how to use the internal DSP multi-effect processor.  
The DSP multi-effect processor incorporates 38 types of digital effects and you can edit parameters for each  
effect type.  
To understand various effect functions, we recommend to operate the unit while hearing how the actual effect  
sound changes.  
The DSP multi-effect processor built in the VF08 uses the Fostex A.S.P. (Advanced Signal Processing) technology  
and provides the high-performance ambience effect that is comparable to professional reverb units.  
<Note>  
* A. S. P.  
The effect edit operations described here are only avail-  
(Fostex Advanced Signal Processing Technology)  
able to Tracks 1 through 6.  
On Track 7/8, a dedicated "Mastering effects" is built in  
and you can edit the effects while carrying out the mas-  
tering mode. See "Chapter 5 Advanced Functions" for de-  
The A. S. P. is an exclusive new digi-  
tal effect processing technology  
designed by Fostex. This method  
extracts maximum efficiency from  
the limited DSP power.  
tails.  
It achieves an overwhelmingly high  
BeforedescribingtheVF08effecteditmode, webriefly  
explain the effect functions (reverb, delay, chorus and  
flanger).  
density Early Reflection sound and wonderfully smooth  
High Dump response through the H. F. A. (Harmonic  
Feedback Algorithm). Also, it carries out an elaborate  
reverb simulation with clear sounds through the H. D.  
L. P. (Hi-Density Logarithmic Processing), which elimi-  
nates the mutual interference between the numerous  
integrated delay modules and reduce the impurity and  
girt of the sound.  
Reverb:  
The so called Reverb effect consists of various reflection  
sounds mixed together. For example, when you clap your  
hands in a tunnel, you will hear the sound linger even  
after you stop clapping your hands. This is the Reverb.  
The sounds we normally hear in daily life have three types  
of sounds mixed together, i.e., “Direct sound,” “Early Re-  
flection sound” and “Late Reflection sound.”  
The Direct sound means the sound directly reaches the  
ears from the sound source. The Early Reflection sound  
means the sound that comes after the Direct sound and  
has rebound off the wall of the tunnel up to a few times.  
The Late Reflection sound means that the sound rebounds  
many times long after the Direct sound has disappeared.  
Our ears normally hear the “Direct sound” - “Early Reflec-  
tion sound” - “Late Reflection sound” in the order.  
* H. F. A. (Harmonic Feedback Algorithm)  
There is one of indispensable elements in the natural  
echo called “Early Reflection Sound,” which is usually  
sacrificed in commercial reverb products in order to  
reduce costs. (In practice, the Early Reflection Sound  
means the very first reverberated sound that bounces  
back from walls, floors and ceilings of concert halls).  
The entire reverb sound quality depends on this Early  
Reflection Sound and how closely it can resemble the  
real echo. The H. F. A. is an algorithm that enables the  
effect unit to reproduce a clear and natural Early Re-  
flection Sound by applying an ideal harmonic feed-  
back to each delay module.  
Delay:  
This is the effect to added a delayed sound to the original  
sound. You can obtain a richer sound or completely change  
the original source sound by using the Delay.  
* H. D. L. P. (Hi-Density Logarithmic Processing)  
The reverb sounds consist of lots of small delay ele-  
ments combined in a complex way, which are produced  
by many delay modules inside the effect unit. In order  
to obtain smooth and comfortable reverb sounds, it is  
very important to efficiently organize the relationship  
between each delay module and minimize negative  
mutual interference. The H. D. L. P. is a technology  
which applies efficient logarithmic processing to each  
delay module, so that they can work in the most effi-  
cient way in order to eliminate harmful reverb elements  
and roughness. This makes it possible to establish high  
density and transparent sounds.  
Chorus:  
This makes the one original sound appear to have many  
sources. The Chorus is used to widen or thicken the origi-  
nal sound.  
Flanger:  
The Flanger is one of applications of the Delay.  
This is used to create a sound like a jet airplane ascending  
or descending.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Functions  
Select the desired track by pressing the correspond-  
ing [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key (or using the  
[CURSOR </>] keys).  
The icon of the selected track is highlighted, indicat-  
ing that you can edit it.  
In the default settings, the send levels for Tracks 1  
through 6 are "00" while the level for Master is "80."  
2
<Hint>  
In effect editing, pressing the [EFFECT] key switches the  
setting screen shown on the LCD display in the following  
order. “Effect send level setting screen” -> “Effect type/  
parameter setting screen” -> “Effect send pre/post set-  
ting screen”  
On each screen, you can edit parameters.  
Effect send level setting screen  
Use the [JOG] dial to adjust the send level value.  
The knob icon also rotates according to the level value.  
Whenthelevelissetto"00", nosignalissenttotheeffect  
processor.  
3
Effect type/parameter setting screen  
• Editable tracks:  
• Level range:  
• Default level:  
Tracks 1 through 6  
00 through 99 in 1 step  
Tracks 1 through 6: 00, Master: 80  
Effect send pre/post setting screen  
To edit the send level for another track, repeat steps 2  
and 3 above.  
4
5
To edit the effect send master level, press the [STA-  
TUS/SEL] key of the master to highlight the master  
level icon, and then use the [JOG] dial to edit the value.  
The default level value is "80."  
After completing send level settings, press the [EXIT/  
NO] key.  
The LCD display returns to the Normal screen.  
6
1
Setting effect send levels  
Selecting an effect type  
You can set send levels from Tracks 1 through 6 to the  
internal A.S.P. effect processor.  
Press the [EFFECT] key to bring up the effect type/  
parameter setting screen.  
Press the [EFFECT] key to bring up the send level  
1
The first time you bring up the screen, "L01: Norm HALL"  
is selected as the effect type.  
setting screen.  
If you have not edited any track parameter for effect  
send, EQ or pan setting after turning on the power last  
time, the message prompting to select a track ("Select  
TRK!") blinks, as well as the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL]  
keys for Tracks 1 through 6 on the panel flash.  
If you have edited any track parameter for effect send,  
EQ or pan setting after turning on the power last time,  
the icon for the previously edited track is highlighted,  
showing that it can be edited.  
From the second time on when bringing up the screen,  
the previously selected effect type is selected.  
Blinking  
Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired effect type.  
You can select an effect type from among L01 through  
L38.  
2
When you select a type other than the current type, the  
type blinks.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Functions  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key after selecting the effect  
type.  
Select the desired track by pressing the correspond-  
ing [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key (or using the  
3
2
Now you can edit the first parameter.  
Intheexamplebelow, the"EffLevel"valueishighlighted  
showing that it can be edited.  
[CURSOR </>] keys).  
The switch icon of the selected track is highlighted,  
indicating that you can edit it.  
In the default settings, all Tracks 1 through 6 are set to  
"Post."  
Edit point  
Use the [JOG] dial to select a value for the highlighted  
parameter.  
See "Effect parameter details" about the available pa-  
rameter values.  
4
Use the [JOG] dial to select "Pre" or "Post."  
The icon changes according to the selection as below.  
3
Pre fader signal is sent to the effect processor.  
Post fader signal is sent to the effect processor.  
To set a value for another parameter, use the [CURSOR  
/down] key to select a parameter to be edited, and then  
use the [JOG] dial to select a value.  
5
6
After completing the settings, press the [EXIT/NO] key.  
The VF08 exits the edit mode and the LCD display re-  
turns to the Normal screen.  
• Selectable tracks: Tracks 1 through 6  
• Setting values: PRE or POST (the default is POST).  
Selecting Pre/Post of the effect send  
You can select the send signals from Tracks 1 through  
6 pre- or post- fader.  
When selecting Post, a signal after the track fader is  
sent to the effect processor. So if you set the fader  
completely down, no signal is sent to the effect pro-  
cessor.  
Turning the effect processor on or off  
You can select the on or off of the effect processor.  
* To turn on the effect processor  
Press the [EFFECT/ON/OFF] key while holding down the  
When selecting Pre, a signal before the track fader is  
sent to the effect processor. So even if you set the fader  
completely down, the signal is sent to the effect pro-  
cessor.  
[SHIFT] key to illuminate the [EFFECT/ON/OFF] key.  
The effect processor is turned on and you can hear "wet"  
sound.  
*To turn off the effect processor  
Press the [EFFECT] key to bring up the pre/post set-  
1
Press the [EFFECT/ON/OFF] key while holding down the  
[SHIFT] key to illuminate the [EFFECT/ON/OFF] key.  
The effect processor is turned off and you can hear "dry"  
sound.  
ting screen.  
If you have not edited any track parameter for effect  
send, EQ or pan setting after turning on the power last  
time, the message prompting to select a track ("Select  
TRK!") blinks,as well as the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL]  
keys for Tracks 1 through 6 on the panel flash.  
If you have edited any track parameter for effect send,  
EQ or pan setting after turning on the power last time,  
the switch icon for the previously edited track is high-  
lighted, showing that it can be edited.  
You can also see the on/off status of the effect proces-  
sor in the effect type/parameter setting screen.  
Blinking  
This icon shows the on/off status of the effect processor.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Functions  
About the effect types  
A variety of effect types are preset for effect unit. By selecting a suitable effect type, you can process the sound  
as you wish. You can also edit the parameters of the selected effect type to create your own effect sounds.  
Name  
Parameter type  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
Explanation  
L01 Norm HALL  
L02 Pres HALL  
L03 Wet HALL  
L04 NoER HALL  
L05 Lo-F HALL  
L06 STADIUM  
Standard hall reverb; detailed and transparent, with a moderate amount of early reflections.  
Hall reverb with presence and definition.  
Hall reverb with restrained high-frequency and a refreshing atmosphere.  
All-purpose hall reverb with no early reflections, and even decay of all frequencies.  
Hall reverb with lingering low-frequency reverberation.  
Stadium reverb characterized by long early reflections.  
L07 AUDITRIUM  
L08 HALL WAY  
L09 Norm ROOM  
L10 Dead ROOM  
L11 Pres ROOM  
L12 DrumBOOTH  
L13 GARAGE  
Reverb simulating an auditorium with suppressed reverberation.  
Reverb with a long pre-delay, creating the impression of an extended space.  
Room reverb simulating a moderate space with some sparkle.  
Room reverb simulating a narrow and dead room. Adding a slight amount will give warmth to the sound.  
All-purpose room reverb, with good definition and few early reflections.  
Room reverb simulating a drum booth.  
Room reverb simulating a narrow and live space like a garage, with crisp presence.  
Modern-sounding plate reverb with wide bandwidth.  
L14 NormPLATE  
L15 Old PLATE  
L16 PresPLATE  
L17 Wet PLATE  
L18 DigiPLATE  
L19 NormVOCAL  
L20 PresVOCAL  
Standard plate reverb with the character of older plate units.  
Plate reverb with good definition and extended high-frequencies.  
Plate reverb with a gentle character.  
Plate reverb that emphasizes a digital character, with metallic early reflections.  
All-purpose hall reverb with no early reflections, and uniform decay at all frequencies.  
Short reverberation with extended high frequency is added to the early reflections of an ideal vocal booth. Since  
this adds sparkle to the sound, it is effective when you wish to bring the vocal to the forefront.  
L21 SoloVOCAL  
L22 Arena VOC  
L23 Arena CHO  
REVERB  
REVERB  
REVERB  
Plate-like reverb is added to a spacious short delay. This blends well with any genre of music.  
Gentle reverb is added to spacious stadium-type early reflections.  
Short reverb with extended high frequency is added to spacious stadium-type early reflections. Effective on  
chorus parts.  
L24 KARAOKE  
L25 MnDL-HALL  
L26 MnDL-PLT  
L27 PnDL-HALL  
L28 PnDL-PLT  
L29 MonoDELAY  
L30 PanDELAY  
L31 MonoBpmDL  
L32 PanBpmDL  
L33 Short DL  
REVERB  
All-purpose reverb (karaoke style) that makes any vocal sound professional.  
A combined effect of mono delay and hall reverb.  
A combined effect of mono delay and plate reverb.  
A combined effect of panning delay and hall reverb.  
A combined effect of panning delay and plate reverb.  
Mono delay  
DLY+REVERB  
DLY+REVERB  
DLY+REVERB  
DLY+REVERB  
DELAY  
DELAY  
Panning delay  
BPM DELAY  
BPM DELAY  
SHORT DELAY  
DOUBLING  
CHORUS  
Mono delay. Specify BPM and note value to set the delay time.  
Panning delay. Specify BPM and note value to set the delay time.  
Short delay that allows you to set the delay time precisely.  
Doubling that allows you to set separate delay times for L and R.  
Produces a chorus effect. A doubling effect can also be added.  
Produces a flanging effect.  
L34 DOUBLING  
L35 CHORUS  
L36 FLANGE  
FLANGE  
L37 MonoPITCH  
L38 DlyPITCH  
MONO PITCH  
DELAY PITCH  
Pitch shift adjustable in a +/-2 octave range.  
Pitch shift with a feedback delay, allowing strange effects to be produced.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Functions  
Effect parameter details  
The parameters that can be adjusted will depend on the parameter type.  
Reverb effect parameters (parameter type: REVERB)  
For effect types 1--24 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following four parameters can be adjusted.  
1. Eff Level  
2. Rev Time  
3. Pre Delay  
4. Hi Ratio  
5. E/R Level  
Adjust the effect return level: 0~99  
Adjust the length of reverberation. Range: 0.1--9.9 seconds  
Adjust the time from the original sound until reverberation begins. Range: 0--100 ms  
Adjust the decay ratio of the high frequencies. Range: 0--10  
Adjust the volume of the early reflections. Range: 0--99  
Delay+reverb effect parameters (parameter type: DELAY+REVERB)  
For effect types 25--28 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following four parameters can be adjusted.  
1. Eff Level  
2. Delay Time  
3. Feedback  
4. Delay Bal  
5. Rev Time  
Adjust the effect return level: 0~99  
Adjust the delay time: Range: 1--230 ms  
Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range: 0--99  
Adjust the delay balance. Range: 0--99  
Adjust the length of reverberation. Range: 0.1--9.9 seconds  
Delay effect parameters (parameter type: DELAY)  
For effect types 29 and 30 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following four parameters can be adjusted.  
1. Eff Level  
2. Delay Time  
3. Feedback  
4. Hi Ratio  
5. Filter  
Adjust the effect return level: 0~99  
Adjust the delay time. Range: 1--680 ms  
Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range: 0--99  
Adjust the decay ratio of the high frequencies. Range: 0--10  
Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9~L1, OFF, H1~H9  
*
*
L1~L9 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)  
H1~H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency)  
BPM delay effect parameters (parameter type: BPM DELAY)  
For effect types 31 and 32 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following four parameters can be adjusted.  
1. Eff Level  
2. BPM  
Adjust the effect return level: 0~99  
Adjust the BPM. Range: 30--250 bpm  
3. Note  
Select the note value for the delay. Range: 24, 16, 8T, 16...8, 4T, 8., 4, 2T, 4., 2, 2., 1  
*
24 = 16th note sextuplets, 16 = 16th notes, 8T = 8th note triplets, 16. = dotted sixteenth notes,  
8 = 8th notes, 4T = quarter note triplets, 8. = dotted eighth notes,  
4 = quarter notes, 2T = half-note triplets, 4. = dotted quarter notes, 2 = half notes  
* The "." shown in the ninth character of the LCD indicates a dotted note.  
* The "T" shown in the ninth character of the LCD indicates a triplet.  
Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range: 0--99 (100 steps in increments of 1)  
Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9~L1, OFF, H1~H9  
4. Feedback  
5. Filter  
*
*
L1~L9 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)  
H1~H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency)  
Short delay effect parameters (parameter type: SHORT DELAY)  
For effect type 33 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following four parameters can be adjusted.  
1. Eff Level  
2. Delay Time  
3. Feedback  
4. Hi Ratio  
5. Filter  
Adjust the effect return level: 0~99  
Adjust the delay time. Range: 0.1--9.9 ms, 10--99 ms, 100--200 ms  
Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range: 0--99  
Adjust the decay ratio of the high frequencies. Range: 0--10  
Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9~L1, OFF, H1~H9  
*
*
L1~L9 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)  
H1~H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency)  
Doubling effect parameters (parameter type: DOUBLING)  
For effect type 34 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following three parameters can be adjusted.  
1. Eff Level  
2. Lch Delay  
3. Rch Delay  
4. Filter  
Adjust the effect return level: 0~99  
Adjust the delay time of the L channel. Range: 0.1--9.9 ms, 10--99 ms, 100--200 ms  
Adjust the delay time of the R channel. Range: 0.1--9.9 ms, 10--99ms, 100--200 ms  
Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9~L1, OFF, H1~H9  
*
*
L1~L9 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)  
H1~H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency)  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Functions  
Chorus effect parameters (parameter type: CHORUS)  
For effect type 35 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following four parameters can be adjusted.  
1. Eff Level  
2. Depth  
Adjust the effect return level: 0~99  
Adjust the chorus depth. Range: 0--99  
3. Double Time  
4. Double Lvl  
5. Filter  
Adjust the time difference of the doubling effect. Range: 0--99  
Adjust the volume of the doubling effect. Range: 0--99  
Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9~L1, OFF, H1~H9  
* L1~L9 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)  
* H1~H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency)  
Flanger effect parameters (parameter type: FLANGE)  
For effect type 36 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following four parameters can be adjusted.  
1. Eff Level  
2. Rate  
3. Depth  
4. Mod Delay  
5. Feedback  
Adjust the effect return level: 0~99  
Adjust the speed of modulation. Range: 0.01--2.00 Hz  
Adjust the depth of modulation. Range: 0--99  
Adjust the modulation delay. Range: 0--200  
Adjust the number of modulation repeats. Range: 0--99  
Mono pitch effect parameters (parameter type: MONO PITCH)  
For effect type 37 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following three parameters can be adjusted.  
1. Eff Level  
2. Pitch  
Adjust the effect return level: 0~99  
Adjust the amount of pitch shift. Range: -24--0--+24  
*
+/-12 is one octave. +/-24 is two octaves.  
Make fine adjustments to the amount of pitch shift. Range: -50--0--+50  
+50 is a semitone sharp. -50 is a semitone flat.  
Select the processing method. Range: 1--3  
3. Adjust  
4. Mode  
*
Delay pitch effect parameters (parameter type: DELAY PITCH)  
For effect type 38 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following four parameters can be adjusted.  
1. Eff Level  
2. Pitct  
Adjust the effect return level: 0~99  
Adjust the amount of pitch shift. Range: -24--0--+24  
*
+/-12 is one octave. +/-24 is two octaves.  
Make fine adjustments to the amount of pitch shift. Range: -50--0--+50  
+50 is a semitone sharp. -50 is a semitone flat.  
3. Adjust  
*
4. Delay Time  
5. Feedback  
Adjust the delay time until the pitch-shifted sound is heard. Range: 0--500 ms  
Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range: 0--99  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Functions  
Scene memory  
The VF08 provides 100 Scene memories (S00 to S99) for each program. You can store a set of desired parameter  
settings to each memory. Items to be stored include all parameters set by mix parameter editing functions, as  
well as all track fader levels. In addition to 100 Scene memories, the VF08 also provides 10 Temporary memories  
(T00 to T09) that can be used with all programs in common. Note that all settings stored in Temporary memories  
disappear when turning off the power.  
You can give a desired title (name) with up to 16 alphanumeric or symbolic characters to each Scene/Temporary  
memory. (Note that up to 11 characters can be shown on the display.)  
Enter the desired scene name by using the [JOG] dial  
for selecting a character and using the [CURSOR </>]  
3
Storing the current scene  
keys for moving the editing (blinking) point.  
You can specify a scene name with up to 16 alphanu-  
meric or symbolic characters and can see up to 14 char-  
acters on the display. The following characters can be  
entered:  
You can store the current scene (settings) to a Scene  
or Temporary memory by using the following proce-  
dure.  
<Hint>  
Scene memories (shown as S00 through S99 on the list)  
are retained even if the power is turned off, while Tem-  
porary memories (shown as T00 through T09 on the list)  
disappear when the power is turned off, though they do  
not disappear when changing the program.  
If you want to store a Temporary memory to a Scene  
memory (S00 to S99), recall the temporary number be-  
fore turning off the power and store the settings to the  
desired Scene memory number.  
A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, + - * / # & ! ? ( ) [ ] < > : . , etc.  
After completing the scene name entry, press the  
[TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down the  
[SHIFT] key.  
The display changes to the Normal display of the pro-  
gram whose scene name has just been set.  
4
Press the [SCENE] key.  
1
The display shows the screen for selecting the desired  
scene number.  
Recalling a scene  
You can recall the settings stored in Scene or Tempo-  
rary memories.  
<Cautions>  
• If the "Fader recall On/Off setting" menu described  
later is set to "OFF", when recalling a desired scene  
memory, fader settings are not recalled, while "Scene  
Recalled Fader RCL OFF" is momentarily shown on the  
screen.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired scene number  
2
to which you want to store the current settings, and  
press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down  
the [SHIFT] key. (In the following example, "S01" is  
• If the "Fader recall On/Off setting" menu is set to "ON",  
regardless of the current physical positions of track  
and master faders, the audio is output at the fader  
positions when they were stored. We suggest you to  
turn the monitor volume down when recalling a scene  
memory to prevent an accidentally accessing high-  
volume sound.  
selected.)  
The scene name of the program which you worked with  
before entering the scene memory mode is duplicated  
to the name of the selected scene number, whose  
leftmost character blinks, showing that it can be edited.  
Press the [SCENE] key.  
1
The display shows the screen for selecting the scene  
number.  
Blinking  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Functions  
Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired scene number  
to be recalled.  
2
3
Fader adjust  
After recalling a scene, the recalled fader level usu-  
ally does not match the current physical fader posi-  
tion, you can move the physical faders to match the  
current fader positions of the scene.  
The following description is assumed that "Fader re-  
call setting" of the setup mode is set to "Trk & Mst."  
Press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the  
[SHIFT] key.  
The selected scene is recalled and the display changes  
to the Normal display.  
Deleting a scene  
Press the [SCENE/FADER] key while holding down the  
1
[SHIFT] key.  
You can delete an unnecessary Scene or Temporary  
memory by using the following procedure.  
The display shows the fader setting screen.  
The fader icon changes according to the relation be-  
tween the physical fader position and recalled fader  
position, as show below.  
<Notes>  
• You cannot delete the memory in scene number 00.  
If you select scene number 00 and try to delete the  
memory, "DELETE" does not appear on the display.  
• You cannot undo deleting a scene.  
Be sure not to select a wrong scene number to be  
deleted.  
Press the [SCENE] key.  
1
The display shows the scene number/title list.  
•The current physical fader po-  
sition is lower than the recalled  
position.  
Select a memory to be deleted using the [JOG] dial.  
2
Press the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down  
3
the [SHIFT] key.  
Themessageaskingforconfirmationtodeletethescene  
appears and "Sure?" blinks.  
•The current physical fader po-  
sition matches the recalled po-  
sition.  
•The current physical fader po-  
sition is higher than the recalled  
position.  
To cancel to delete the mark, press the [EXIT/NO] key  
now.  
Move a physical fader manually to match the recalled  
(scene memory) position.  
2
3
After adjusting all the fader positions, press the [EXIT/  
NO] key.  
<Note>  
If you recall a scene when "Fader recall setting" of  
the setup mode is set to "OFF", the current physical  
fader positions are valid.  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key while holding down the  
4
[RECORD] key.  
The selected memory is deleted and the scene name  
changes to "[Un-defined]", showing that no memory  
is stored.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key.  
5
The display returns to the Normal screen.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Functions  
Scene sequence  
Using the scene sequence function, you can recall desired scene memories at the desired mark positions during  
playback. For example, you can recall scene memory 02 at "Bar 17/Beat 1" and scene memory 04 at "Bar 25/Beat  
1", etc. To execute the scene sequence function, you must first assign scene (or temporary) memories to marks  
in the mark map. If you set the timebase to Bar/Beat/Clk, you can assign scene memories to be recalled to the  
musical positions (Bar/Beat/Clk numbers). Of course, you may set the timebase to ABS.  
Highlight "Non" using the [CURSOR </>] keys, and then  
select the desired scene number to be assigned to the  
mark using the [JOG] dial.  
<Note>  
3
You must store data to scene memories before assigning  
to the mark map.  
When selecting a scene number which holds data, its  
scene title is also shown below the scene number.  
Assigning scene memories to the mark map  
In the following description, we assume that the  
timebase is set to Bar/Beat/Clk.  
While the recorder is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ/  
1
MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
The screen shows the mark map, in which the current  
marks are listed.  
In the mark map example below, only scene memory  
00 is assigned to mark 00. ("Non" means that no  
memory is assigned to the corresponding mark.)  
Mark title  
Scene number  
<Hint>  
Scene title  
You can view mark titles instead of mark positions  
(in bar/beat/clock base or ABS time base) in the mark  
map. Pressing the [TIME BASE SEL] key while the mark  
map screen is shown switches mark positions and  
mark titles.  
After selecting the scene number, press the [ENTER/  
YES] key.  
Repeat steps 1 through 4 to assign scene numbers to  
other marks.  
4
In the example below, several scene numbers are as-  
signed to marks and you are ready for executing the  
scene sequence function described later.  
Select the desired mark using the [JOG] dial, and then  
2
press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down  
the [SHIFT] key.  
The display shows the screen for editing the selected  
mark.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key after assigning all desired  
scenes to marks.  
5
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mixer Functions  
Executing the scene sequence  
Deleting a mark from the mark map  
You can delete an unnecessary mark from the mark  
map.  
If you start playback while the scene sequence func-  
tion is active (ON), the scenes will be recalled accord-  
ing to the mark map.  
<Note>  
You cannot delete mark 00.  
<Note>  
When executing the scene sequence, the fader positions  
may be recalled or not according to the fader recall mode  
setting in the setup mode (the default is "OFF").  
For example, if you set the fader recall mode to "ON", both  
the track and master faders are automatically recalled  
every time the current scene changes.  
On the contrary, if you set the fader recall mode to "OFF"  
(the default mode), fader positions are not recalled so you  
can manually control fader positions as you like.  
We suggest you to make sure to set the fader recall mode  
suitably for your work before executing the scene se-  
quence. See "Fader recall mode setting" on page 110 for  
details.  
While the VF08 is stopped, press the SCENE SEQ/MAP  
1
key while holding down the SHIFT key.  
The screen shows the mark map.  
Highlight the desired mark using the [JOG] dial.  
2
Press the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down the  
3
[SHIFT] key.  
The message asking for confirmation to delete the mark  
appears and "Sure?" blinks.  
To cancel to delete the mark, press the [EXIT/NO] key  
now.  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key while holding down the  
4
<Screen appearances during playback>  
The following show the screen appearances during play-  
back with the mark map in which scene number 02 (with  
the title "BBBB") is assigned to "Bar 12, Beat 1" and scene  
number 06 (with the title "CCCC") is assigned to "Bar 20,  
Beat 4."  
[RECORD] key.  
The map is deleted and the following marks are renum-  
bered.  
Scene sequence on/off selection  
You can turn on or off the scene sequence function  
for selecting whether or not performing the scene  
sequence function using the mark map.  
The unit starts playback from "Bar -2, Beat 1" with  
the settings stored in scene number 00 (Init Mix).  
While the VF08 is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ] key.  
1
The [SCENE SEQ] key lights in green, showing that the  
scene sequence function is active (ON).  
Each time you press the [SCENE SEQ] key, ON and OFF  
alternates.  
When turning on the scene sequence function, "SCENE  
SQ: ON" appears momentarily on the Normal display  
and then the scene number is highlighted.  
Theunitrecallsscenenumber02(BBBB)at"Bar  
12, Beat 1" and continues playback.  
When turning off the scene sequence function, "SCENE  
SQ: OFF" appears momentarily on the Normal display  
and then the highlighted scene number returns to the  
Normal screen  
The unit recalls scene number 06 (CCCC) at "Bar  
20, Beat 4" and continues playback.  
<Hint>  
The unit continues playback with the settings stored  
in the scene number recalled last time.  
Therefore, ifyouwanttorecallscenenumber00again  
after recalling scene number 06 above,. you have to  
assign scene number 00 to the desired mark.  
Highlighted  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder Functions  
Recorder Functions  
This chapter describes various recorder functions.  
Cueing  
The cueing function allows you to monitor audio at higher or lower speed.  
• Rotating the [JOG/SHUTTLE] dial clockwise moves the  
Cueing with the [F FWD]/[REWIND] keys  
position to the forward direction, while rotating the dial  
counter-clockwise moves the position to the backward  
direction.  
By pressing the [F FWD] or [REWIND] key during play-  
back, you can monitor (cue) the sound at 3 times the  
normal speed.  
• According to the rotating degree, the cueing speed varies  
among 1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x, 32x, and 64x.  
The current cueing speed is shown on the screen.  
Press the [PLAY] key to start playback.  
1
• As long as holding down the [SHIFT] key, shuttle cueing  
continues even if you release the [JOG/SHUTTLE] dial.  
Press the [F FWD] or [REWIND] key during playback.  
2
The VF08 is "cueing" in the forward direction at 64x the normal speed.  
The VF08 is "cueing" in the backward direction at 64x the normal speed.  
The VF08 is still.  
The VF08 starts "cueing" at 3 times the normal speed,  
while "FWD" or "RWD" appears on the screen.  
The VF08 is "cueing" in the forward direction.  
The VF08 is "cueing" in the backward direction.  
To return to the normal playback, press the [PLAY] key.  
3
To return to the normal playback, press the [PLAY] key.  
3
Shuttle cueing  
<Remember!>  
Once the data is rewound to the beginning of a pro-  
gram (ABS 0), playback starts from the beginning of  
the program, regardless of pressing the [SHIFT] key.  
When reaching the end of a program (ABS: 23H 59M  
59S), the program stops and the [PLAY] hey flashes.  
During playback, "shuttle cueing" is possible at the  
speed between 1 and 64 times the normal speed.  
Press the [PLAY] key to start playback.  
1
Rotate the [JOG/SHUTTLE] dial while holding down the  
2
[SHIFT] key.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder Functions  
Storing the digital scrub point  
Digital scrubbing  
You can store the scrub point to the Start, End or To  
point for track editing functions (such as Copy, Move,  
Paste and Erase), or the auto-punch in point.  
Digital scrubbing can be done between 0x and 1x  
speed without changing the pitch while the VF08 is  
stopped.  
You can scrub audio track by track. The level enve-  
lope of the scrub track is shown on the screen, allow-  
ing you to locate the beginning of a song or interval  
of songs easily.  
To store the scrub point to the Start point:  
Press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the [SHIFT]  
key.  
"Edit Start Point Stored!" is shown briefly and then the  
scrub point is stored to the Start point for track editing.  
Furthermore, you can use the position located by  
digital scrubbing as an edit point for the track editing  
or auto-punch in/out.  
Performing digital scrubbing  
While stopped, press the [WAVE FORM SCRUB] key.  
1
The VF08 enters the scrub mode, and the display shows  
the screen below.  
To store the scrub point to the End point:  
Press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down  
the [SHIFT] key.  
"Edit End Point Stored!" is shown briefly and then the scrub  
point is stored to the End point for track editing.  
Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key for the  
2
track you are going to scrub.  
The level envelope of audio recorded on the selected  
track is shown. When the VF08 is stopped, "<STILL>" is  
also shown.  
To store the scrub point to the To point:  
Press the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down the  
[SHIFT] key.  
"Edit To Point Stored!" is shown briefly and then the scrub  
point is stored to the To point, which can be used as the  
starting point of Paste or the auto-punch In point.  
By rotating the [JOG] dial, you can scrub audio of the  
3
selected track.  
The vertical line in the center shows the current posi-  
tion, and you can hear scrubbing audio from this posi-  
tion to either the forward or backward direction.  
When rotating the [JOG] dial clockwise, "Scrub >" is  
shown. When rotating the [JOG] dial counter-clockwise,  
"< Scrub" is shown.  
The cursor (the vertical line) moves while scrubbing,  
while the time value (or bar/beat) of the current posi-  
tion is shown in realtime.  
• After storing the point, press the [EXIT/NO] key.  
The display returns to the Normal screen that was shown  
when finishing scrubbing.  
<Hint>  
• You can also store the point by pressing the [ENTER/  
YES] key after highlighting “START”, “END” or “TO” by  
using the [CURSOR >] or [CURSOR <] key.  
• By pressing the [|<</MARK] key while holding down  
the [SHIFT] key, you can store the scrub point to a mark  
memory.  
current scrubbing position  
If you want to scrub another track, repeat steps 2 and 3.  
4
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder Functions  
Vari Pitch  
You can alter the playback or recording speed of the recorder within +/- 6.0 % range in 0.1 % increments/dec-  
rements by using the vari pitch function. With the vari pitch function, the pitch changes according to the speed.  
INPUT  
BAL  
A
ST OUT  
FOOT SW  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
PHONES  
L
R
MIX PARAMETER  
TRACK  
EDIT  
SCENE  
SCENE SEQ.  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
ON/OFF  
ACCESS  
BOUNCE MODE  
2TRK MODE  
TRAINING  
MASTERING  
CH ON/OFF  
CH ON/OFF  
PEAK  
PEAK  
F1  
F2  
F3  
PHANTOM  
RED  
REC  
GREEN  
OFF  
MUTE  
PLAY  
TRACK STATUS  
STATUS  
/SEL  
TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL  
5
4
3
JOG SHUTTLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7/8 2TRK  
CURSOR  
MASTER  
EXIT  
/NO  
EJECT  
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
ENTER  
/YES  
0
0
TIMEBASE  
SEL  
SETUP  
F1  
UNDO  
/
REDO  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F2  
F3  
SHIFT  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
LOCATE  
WAVE FORM  
SCRUB  
AUTO  
PUNCH I/O  
VARI  
PITCH  
LOOP  
EDIT  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
EDIT  
MARK  
DELETE  
EDIT  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
-  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
LOCATE ABS  
0
LOCATE REC END  
3
2
1
"ON" or "OFF" (of the vari pitch function) is also shown  
on the screen.  
Turning on or off the vari pitch function  
Press the [VARI PITCH/EDIT] key.  
The key lights up in green, showing the vari pitch func-  
tion is active.  
1
2
Use the [JOG] dial to enter the pitch value.  
4
5
Press the [EXIT/NO] key to return to the Normal screen.  
Press the [VARI PITCH/EDIT] key again.  
The key turns off, showing the vari pitch function is not  
active.  
<Notes>  
• Even if the pitch value is set to 0.0 % (no speed change),  
pressing the [VARI PITCH] key turns on the vari pitch  
function. In such a condition, the function is active but  
the speed is not changed.  
<Note>  
You can turn on or off the vari pitch function while  
stopped or during playback, however, you cannot turn  
on or off the function during recording.  
• The vari pitch function automatically turns off by  
carrying out any of the following.  
Setting the speed  
1.Turning the power off and then on. (The pitch value  
is also reset to 0.0 %.)  
2.Setting the slave mode to "On" in the setup mode.  
(The pitch value is retained.)  
Note that you cannot turn on the vari pitch function  
when the slave mode is "On".  
3.Setting the digital input to "On" in the setup mode  
("DIGI IN" is shown on the screen).  
You can adjust the speed while stopped or during  
playback, however, you cannot adjust the speed dur-  
ing recording. If you adjust the speed during play-  
backwiththevaripitchfunctionactive, youcanmoni-  
tor the result of speed (pitch) change while adjusting.  
While stopped or during playback, press the [VARI  
1
Note that you cannot turn on the vari pitch function  
when the digital input is selected.  
PITCH/EDIT] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
The current pitch value is highlighted, showing that the  
value can be edited.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder Functions  
Loop Function  
Using the loop function, you can repeat the desired part between the Start and End points.  
By using the loop function together with the punch in/out or training mode, you can concentrate on playing  
without the need for operating the VF08.  
Current time (or musical position)  
<Loop Function>  
START point  
END point  
Playback  
After locating the Start point, playback starts automatically.  
The Start point is set to the captured time (or musical  
position), which is shown here.  
At the point where you want to set the End point, press  
the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down the  
3
When the playback position reaches the End point,  
the recorder locates to the Start point automatically.  
[SHIFT] key.  
"End Point Stored!" briefly appears and the End point is  
set to the captured point.  
Current time (or musical position)  
Setting the Start and End points  
TherearefollowingthreemethodsforsettingtheStart  
and End points.  
1. Capturing the current position "On-the-fly"  
2. Editing the time (or musical position) via the screen  
3. Setting by marks  
The End point is set to the captured time (or musical po-  
sition), which is shown here.  
Capturing the current position "on-the-fly"  
<Note>  
The Start point must be earlier than the End point.  
Otherwise, the loop function cannot be performed.  
While stopped or running, you can set the Start or End  
point at the point you capture.  
Press the [LOOP/EDIT] key while holding down the  
1
[SHIFT] key.  
Editing the position via the screen  
The display shows the loop screen in which you can set  
the Start and End points.  
In the following description, the recorder is assumed  
to be stopped and the ABS time base is selected.  
Current time (or musical position)  
Press the [LOOP/EDIT] key while holding down the  
1
[SHIFT] key.  
The display shows the loop screen in which you can set  
the Start and End points.  
At the point where you want to set the Start point, press  
2
the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
"Start Point Stored!" briefly appears and the Start point  
is set to the captured point.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder Functions  
To edit the Start point, press the [ENTER/YES] key while  
"Start Point" value is highlighted.  
2
The "seconds" value blinks, showing that it can be ed-  
ited.  
A mark is shown.  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The mark shown on the Start point value field starts  
blinking.  
3
The "seconds" value blinks.  
Use the [CURSOR </>] keys to move the blinking value,  
3
and use the [JOG] dial to edit the value.  
You can also use the [CURSOR up/down] keys to edit the  
value.  
Blinking  
After editing all values, press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display returns to the similar screen shown in step  
1 above, in which the Start point is set to the edited time.  
4
5
Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired mark and press  
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The Start point is set to the selected mark, while the  
display returns to the similar screen shown in step 2  
above.  
4
5
To edit the End point, use the [CURSOR down] key to  
highlight the "End point" value and carry out the same  
operations as steps 2 through 4 above.  
<Note>  
To edit the End point, use the [CURSOR down] key to  
highlight the "End point" value and carry out the same  
operations as steps 3 through 4 above.  
As also noted in "capturing the current position on-the-  
fly", the Start point must be earlier than the End point.  
Otherwise, the loop function cannot be performed.  
The selected mark is set to the End point.  
<Hint>  
When rehearsing the auto punch in/out, if you also  
activate the loop function in which the Start point is  
set to a point a little bit earlier than the In point while  
the End point is set to a point a little bit later than the  
Out point, you can rehearse the auto punch in/out  
repeatedly as many times as you like.  
Setting the Start and End points by marks  
You can set the Start and End points by marks.  
Theloopfunctionisalsousefulwhenyoumakeaprac-  
tice using the training mode.  
<Note>  
This method only can be used when any mark point is  
already stored.  
Carrying out the loop playback  
While stopped, press the [LOOP/EDIT] key while hold-  
1
Once setting the Start and End points, you can carry  
out the loop function.  
ing down the [SHIFT] key.  
The display shows the loop screen in which you can set  
the Start and End points.  
Press the [LOOP] key to illuminate the key.  
1
The loop function is now active.  
Each time you press the [LOOP] key, On and Off of the  
loop function alternates.  
Start playback from the point earlier than the Start point.  
2
When the recorder reaches the End point, it automati-  
cally locates to the Start point and starts playback from  
that point. The recorder continues loop playback until  
stopping the recorder.  
Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key.  
2
Both the Start point and End point value fields show a  
mark (number and name).  
To stop loop playback, press the [LOOP] key to turn off  
3
the lamp and press the [STOP] key.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder Functions  
Program  
The VF08 can have up to 99 programs (P01 through P99) and usually each program manages one song. You can  
make recording against each program or playback materials recorded on each program.  
This section describe program-related operations.  
Note that you may use the program with the tentative  
title ("#0002" in this example) if you do not need to en-  
ter the desired one. Anyway, you may also enter/edit  
the title later by the procedure described in "Editing a  
program title" on page 57.  
To use the program with the tentative title, press the  
[EXIT/NO] key. To put the desired title, see the following.  
Creating a new program  
When formatting a hard disk, a program (P01) is au-  
tomatically created.  
To create a new program, follow the procedure below  
while the recorder is stopped and the display shows  
the Normal screen.  
<Note>  
<How to enter a desired title>  
• Rotate the [JOG] dial (or [CURSOR up/down] keys)  
to select a character for the blinking point from  
among those listed below.  
The initial settings for a new program are copied from the  
setting of the current program.  
Therefore, if you want to make a new program with the  
same settings as an existing program, bring up the pro-  
gram before creating a new program.  
• Use the [CURSOR </>] keys to move the blinking  
point.  
Press the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while holding down  
1
the [SHIFT] key.  
The screen for selecting, renaming or deleting a pro-  
gram appears. (The screen example below shows the  
initial condition where only Program 01 exists.)  
<Hint>  
When selecting a character, rotating the [JOG] dial  
while holding down the [SHIFT] key jumps among  
characters surrounded with the box above.  
This function will allow you to save time for select-  
ing a desired character.  
Use the [JOG] dial to highlight "P02 [New Program]"  
2
and then press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
When highlighting "P02 [New Program]", only high-  
lighted "SELECT" is shown at the bottom of the screen.  
Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key creates a new program  
(P02 in this example) with the tentative title whose  
leftmost character ("#" in this example) is highlighted.  
In this condition, you can enter the program title by  
following the procedure described in "<How to enter a  
desired title> below.  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key after entering the title.  
The title is set.  
3
4
Press the [EXIT/NO] (or [STOP]) key.  
The setup mode exits and the display shows the Nor-  
mal screen of the newly created program.  
<Hint>  
• When creating a new program, the next program  
number to the highest program number in the  
existing programs is assigned.  
If there is only one program (P01), Program 02  
(P02) will be created. If there is five programs (P01  
through P05), Program 06 (P06) will be created.  
• Creating a new program consumes a small amount  
of the recordable disk space. Also note that when  
the recordable disk space is not enough, you  
cannot create a new program.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder Functions  
Press the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while holding down  
the [SHIFT] key.  
1
Selecting a program  
Thescreenforselecting, renamingordeletingaprogram  
appears. In the screen, all existing program numbers  
and titles are shown.  
When more than one program exists on the disk, you  
have to select the desired program before starting  
operations for recording, playback or editing.  
Selectthedesiredprogrambyfollowingtheprocedure  
below while the recorder is stopped and the display  
shows the Normal screen.  
Press the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while holding down  
1
the [SHIFT] key.  
Thescreenforselecting, renamingordeletingaprogram  
appears. In the screen, all existing program numbers  
and titles are shown.  
Use the [JOG] dial to highlight the program to be de-  
leted and then press the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while  
holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
2
The screen shows "Delete! Sure?", asking you confirm.  
Use the [JOG] dial to highlight the desired program and  
2
then press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the  
[SHIFT] key.  
<Hint>  
Youmayusethe [CURSOR>] tohighlight"DELETE"and  
press the [ENTER/YES] key to bring up the screen  
above, instead of pressing the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key  
while holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key while holding down the  
[RECORD] key.  
The selected (highlighted) program is deleted, and the  
following programs in the list move up.  
3
4
Deleting a program  
You can delete an unnecessary program individually.  
To make recording or editing, a certain amount of disk  
space is needed. By deleting unnecessary programs,  
the available disk space increases.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key to switch to the Normal screen.  
The previous program of the deleted program is se-  
lected.  
<Notes>  
• When only one program (P01) exists, if you try to  
delete the program, the data in the program is deleted  
but P01 remains.  
Editing a program title  
You can edit a program title anytime by following the  
procedure below.  
Note that you can also enter a program title in the  
process of creating a new program as mentioned ear-  
lier.  
• For example, when five programs (P01 through P05)  
exist, if you delete P03, it looks like P05 is deleted. This  
is because the program numbers higher than 03 move  
down. In other words, P04 and P05 become P03 and  
P04 respectively.  
Press the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while holding down  
1
P05  
P03  
P04  
P02  
P01  
the [SHIFT] key.  
Thescreenforselecting, renamingordeletingaprogram  
appears. In the screen, all existing program numbers  
and titles are shown.  
P03 is deleted.  
P03  
P04  
P02  
P01  
Note that you cannot undo or redo deleting the program.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder Functions  
You can put a title name with up to 16 characters from  
among those listed below.  
When selecting a character, rotating the [JOG] dial while  
holding down the [SHIFT] key jumps among characters  
surrounded with the box below.  
Use the [JOG] dial to highlight (select) the desired pro-  
gram and then press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while  
holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
Now you can edit the title of the selected program.  
The leftmost character of the selected program is blink-  
ing.  
2
Blinking  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key after editing/entering the  
title.  
The edited/entered title is set.  
<Hint>  
4
5
You may use the [CURSOR >] to highlight "RENAME"  
and press the [ENTER/YES] key to bring up the screen  
above, instead of pressing the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key  
while holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] (or [STOP]) key.  
The display returns to the Normal screen.  
Use the [CURSOR </>] keys to move the blinking (ed-  
iting) point and use the [JOG] dial (or [CURSOR up/  
down] keys) to select a character for the blinking point.  
3
Track editing  
Because the VF08 uses a 3.5-inch E-IDE hard disk as the recording media, you can make non-linear and non-  
destructive audio editing by track effectively.  
Copy & Paste  
Move & Paste  
The Copy & Paste function allows you to copy track  
data of a desired part and paste it to a desired part of  
the same or different track.  
The Move & Paste function allows you to move track  
data of a desired part and paste it to a desired part of  
the same or different track.  
The copied data remains after pasting the data, so you  
can paste the data as many times as required.  
The copy & paste function is useful when using the  
same musical part repeatedly in a song.  
Unlike the copy & paste operation, the moved data  
does not remain in the original position.  
Copy & paste within the same track.  
Move & paste within the same track.  
A
A
A'  
A'  
A'  
Copy & paste between different track.  
Move & paste between different track.  
A'  
START Point END Point  
START Point END Point  
TO Point  
TO Point  
<Notes>  
• Copy data (or Move data) is replaced with the new data every time the copy (or move) operation is carried out.  
• Note that copy data changes if you paste the copy data to the original data.  
• The copy & paste (or move & paste) editing is performed on the current program. Therefore, do not change the current  
program until the editing operations are completed.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder Functions  
The corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys of  
the source track(s) light in green, while the correspond-  
ing [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys of the destination  
track(s) light in red.  
Performing Copy (or Move) & Paste  
Set the Start and End points for the copy (or move)  
1
2
operation and To point for the paste operation.  
Using the digital scrub function, set the Start, End and  
To points. See "Storing the digital scrub point" for details  
about how to set the points.  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key after selecting tracks.  
The display shows the "Point Select" screen as below, in  
which you can view the Start, End and To points set via  
the digital scrub operation.  
6
While the recorder is stopped, press the [TRACK EDIT]  
key.  
The screen for selecting the track edit type appears.  
<Hints>  
On the screen above, you can perform the following  
operations.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select "Copy Paste" (or "Move  
3
Paste") and then press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display shows the screen for selecting the source  
track(s) and destination track(s).  
1. Editing the Start, End and To points  
2. Setting the Start and To points to "ABS 0" and the End point  
to "REC END"  
3. Checking the data to be copied (or moved)  
4. Setting the Start, End and To points by marks  
or "MovePaste"  
To edit the Start, End and To points:  
Highlight the time field of the desired (Start, End or To) point,  
and then press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The "seconds" value starts blinking, showing that you can  
edit it. Use the [CURSOR </>] keys to move the blinking  
value, and use the [JOG] dial to enter a value.  
After entering the desired time, pressing the [ENTER/YES]  
key to store the time data to the point.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select the source track(s) from  
which the data is copied (moved).  
Rotating the [JOG] dial changes the options among 1  
through 8, 1&2, 3&4, 5&6, 7&8, 1-6, and 1-8.  
4
5
• To set the Start and To points to "ABS 0" and the End  
point to "REC END":  
Press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
"ALL OFF" changes to "ALL ON", and the Start and To  
points are set to "ABS 0", while the End point is set to "REC  
END" point. This function is useful when you copy (or  
move) all track data (from "ABS 0" to "REC END") to dif-  
ferent track(s).  
Use the [CURSOR >] key to highlight (and blink) the right  
field, and use the [JOG] dial to select the destination  
track(s) to which the data is copied (moved).  
Rotating the [JOG] dial changes the options as below  
depending on the track(s) you selected in step 4.  
• To check (monitor) the data to be copied (or moved)  
[Source Play function]:  
Source track(s)  
Destination options  
Press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down the  
[SHIFT] key.  
The display shows the "Source Play" screen as shown  
below and the recorder starts playback of the data to be  
copied (or moved).  
a mono track (1 through 8)  
a pair of tracks  
1-6  
1-8  
1 through 8  
1&2, 3&4, 5&6, and 7&8  
1-6 only  
1-8 only  
In the example below, data on tracks 3&4 is copied (or  
moved) and pasted onto tracks 7&8.  
Youcanhearaudiobymovingupthecorrespondingtrack  
fader. After checking audio, press the [STOP] key. The  
display returns to the screen shown before performing  
the Source play function.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder Functions  
Press the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down the  
[SHIFT] key.  
The copy & paste (or move & paste) function is per-  
formed. When finished, "Completed!" appears on the  
screen.  
8
• To set editing points by marks:  
Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key.  
Each data field for the Start, End and To points changes  
to show the current option by mark as shown below.  
Use the [CURSOR up/down] keys to highlight the field for  
the desired point, and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The field starts blinking.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired mark and press  
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
<Hint>  
You may use the [CURSOR >] to highlight "EXE" and press  
the [ENTER/YES] key to perform the function, instead of  
pressing the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down the  
[SHIFT] key.  
The point is set to the selected mark.  
<Note>  
<Note>  
Thisoperationcanbeperformedonlywhenanymark  
is set. When no mark is set, "00:ABS 0" is the one and  
only option for each point.  
The copy & paste (or move & paste) operation cannot be  
performed when there is not enough disk space to per-  
form the undo and redo operations. If you try to perform  
the paste operation when there is not enough disk space,  
The display will show "Over Time!", as well as the short  
time.  
In such a case, shorten the copy (or move) data by the  
amount more than the displayed time or delete unnec-  
essary sections or programs to keep the enough space,  
and then try to paste again.  
Use the [CURSOR down] key to highlight the field ("01"  
above) for the number of times for repeat paste, and  
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
"01" starts blinking and you can now enter the number  
of times for repeat paste.  
6
Undo/redo of Copy & Paste  
You can undo a copy & paste or move & paste opera-  
tion, as well as redo it (undo the undo operation).  
• By pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key after completing the  
copy & paste (or move & paste) operation, you can  
return the track(s) to the condition before performing  
the copy & paste (or move & paste) operation.  
• By pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key just after  
performingtheundooperation, youcanundotheundo  
operation and return the track(s) to the condition  
after performing the copy & paste (or move & paste)  
operation.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired number and  
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
You can select any number between "01" and "99".  
7
<Note>  
Basically you can select the number of times for repeat  
paste between 1 and 99, however, if the recordable space  
of the hark disk is limited, you may not be able to select  
the desired number. The VF08 automatically calculate  
the available space and limit the number of times to the  
appropriate value.  
Note the following for performing the undo/redo opera-  
tion.  
<Notes>  
You can undo or redo only when the recorder is stopped.  
If you carry out any of the following after performing the  
copy & paste (or move & paste) operation, you cannot  
undo/redo the copy & paste (or move & paste) opera-  
tion.  
When setting the number of times for repeat paste to 02,  
the copy & paste function is performed as below.  
Copy & paste within the same track.  
1.Making a new recording  
2.Performing a new editing  
A
A'  
A''  
A''  
3.Letting the recorder run in playback (or recording)  
mode and pass through the auto punch-in point while  
the auto punch mode is active  
4.Turning off the power of the VF08  
5.Performing any of the program operations (select,  
rename or delete).  
Copy & paste between different track.  
A'  
START Point END Point  
TO Point  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder Functions  
Use the [JOG] dial to select the track(s) to be erased.  
Rotating the [JOG] dial changes the options among 1  
through 8, 1&2, 3&4, 5&6, 7&8, 1-6, and 1-8.  
The corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key(s)  
of the selected track(s) light in red.  
4
5
Erasing track data  
You can erase a desired part of track data. You can  
select a track or tracks (of which you are going to erase  
data) from among each individual track, each pair of  
tracks, 1-6 and 1-8.  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key after selecting the track(s).  
The screen shows the Start and End points.  
REC END  
ABS 0  
Erase  
START Point END Point  
<Notes for the erase function>  
• When all eight tracks (1 through 8) are recorded, if you  
erase a part of the chosen track, only the erased part  
becomes silent (no audio) and the following material  
does not move advance to fill the gap.  
Therefore, the REC END point remains the same.  
However, if you erase a part between the chosen point  
(=Start point) and the REC END point (=End point) of  
all tracks, the REC END point moves advance.  
<Hint>  
On the screen above, you can perform the following  
operations.  
1. Editing the Start and End points  
2. Setting the Start point to "ABS 0" and the End point to "REC  
END"  
3. Checking the data to be erased  
4. Setting the Start and End points by marks  
• The erase operations are performed on the current  
program. Therefore, do not change the current pro  
gram until all the operations are completed.  
To edit the Start and End points:  
Highlight the time field of a desired (Start or End) point, and  
then press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
Erasing  
The"seconds"valuestartsblinking, showingthatyoucan  
edit it. Use the [CURSOR </>] keys to move the blinking  
value, and use the [JOG] dial to enter a value.  
After entering the desired time, pressing the [ENTER/YES]  
key to store the time data to the point.  
Set the Start and End points for the erase operation.  
1
Using the digital scrub function, set the Start and End  
points. See "Storing the digital scrub point" for details  
about how to set the points.  
To set the Start point to "ABS 0" and the End point to  
"REC END":  
Press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
"ALL OFF" changes to "ALL ON", and the Start point is set  
to "ABS 0", while the End point is set to "REC END" point.  
This function is useful when you erase all track data.  
While the recorder is stopped, press the [TRACK EDIT]  
2
key.  
The screen for selecting the track edit type appears.  
To check (monitor) the data to be erased [Source Play  
function]:  
Press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down the  
[SHIFT] key.  
The display shows the "Source Play" screen as shown  
below and the recorder starts playback of the data to be  
erased.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select "Erase" and then press the  
3
[ENTER/YES] key.  
The display shows the screen for selecting the track(s)  
to be erased.  
You can hear audio by moving up the corresponding  
track fader. After checking audio, press the [STOP] key.  
The display returns to the screen shown before perform-  
ing the Source play function.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder Functions  
• To set editing points by marks:  
Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key.  
Undo/redo of Erase  
You can undo an erase operation, as well as redo it  
(undo the undo operation).  
Each data field for the Start and End points changes to  
show the current option by mark as shown below.  
• By pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key after completing  
the erase operation, you can return the track(s) to the  
condition before performing the erase operation.  
• By pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key just after  
performing the undo operation, you can undo the  
undo operation and return the track(s) to the  
condition after performing the erase operation.  
Use the [CURSOR up/down] keys to highlight the field for  
the desired point, and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The field starts blinking.  
Note the following for performing the undo/redo op-  
eration.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired mark and press  
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
<Notes>  
The editing point is set to the selected mark.  
You can undo or redo only when the recorder is stopped.  
If you carry out any of the following after performing  
the erase operation, you cannot undo/redo the erase  
operation.  
<Note>  
This operation can be performed only when any mark  
is set. When no mark is set, "00:ABS 0" is the one and  
only option for each point.  
1.Making a new recording  
2.Performing a new editing  
3.Letting the recorder run in playback (or recording)  
mode and pass through the auto punch-in point while  
the auto punch mode is active  
4.Turning off the power of the VF08  
5.Performing any of the program operations (select,  
rename or delete).  
Press the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down the  
[SHIFT] key.  
The erase function is performed. When finished, "Com-  
pleted!" appears on the screen.  
6
<Hint>  
You may use the [CURSOR >] to highlight "EXE" and press  
the [ENTER/YES] key to perform the function, instead of  
pressing the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down the  
[SHIFT] key.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder Functions  
Use the [JOG] dial to select the source track(s).  
Rotating the [JOG] dial changes the options among  
single tracks (1 through 24), pair tracks (1&2 through  
23&24), 1-8, 9-16 and 17-24.  
3
4
Track Exchange  
The track exchange function allows you to exchange  
tracks (regardless of whether they are real or addi-  
tional tracks) on the program in single track unit, 2-  
track unit or 8-track unit.  
Use the [CURSOR >] key to highlight (and blink) the  
right field, and use the [JOG] dial to select the destina-  
By using this function, you can exchange tracks not  
only among real tracks but also between real and  
additional tracks, allowing to use tracks effectively.  
For example, by exchanging a recorded real track with  
an empty additional track, you can transfer data on  
a real track to an additional track temporarily, so that  
you can record a new material onto the real track.  
The track exchange function is also used to check the  
REC END point on an additional track.  
tion track(s).  
You can only select the same number of tracks as the  
source track(s) selected in step 3 above.  
For example, if you select a single track in step 3 above,  
you can only select a single track here.  
<Example 1> Exchanging Track 8 and Track 24  
One track exchange  
8 track block exchange  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
Track 6  
Track 7  
Track 8  
Track 17  
Track 18  
Track 19  
Track 20  
Track 21  
Track 22  
Track 23  
Track 24  
Track 9  
Track 10  
Track 11  
Track 12  
Track 13  
Track 14  
Track 15  
Track 16  
<Example 2> Exchanging Tracks 1&2 and Tracks 7&8  
2 track block exchange  
8 track block exchange  
<Example 3> Exchanging Tracks 1-8 and Tracks 17-24  
Performing the track exchange  
While the recorder is stopped, press the [TRACK EDIT]  
key.  
1
The screen for selecting the track edit type appears.  
After selecting tracks, press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The track exchange function is performed and the dis-  
play returns to the Normal screen.  
5
Use the [JOG] dial to select "Exchange" and then press  
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
2
<Note for Track Exchange>  
If the selected tracks for the left and right fields are re-  
versed, the same track exchange is performed.  
For example, "1-8<->17-24" and "17-24<->1-8" perform the  
same track exchange.  
The setting in which the same track(s) are selected for  
both the left and right fields, such as "1-8<->1-8", is invalid.  
If you press the [ENTER/YES] key with such a setting, the  
display shows the message "Select Err! Hit Any Keys".  
The display shows the screen for selecting the tracks to  
be exchanged. The screen example below shows that  
tracks 01 through 08 and tracks 17 through 24 are ex-  
changed in 8-track unit.  
The left field shows the source track(s), while the right  
fields shows the destination track(s).  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder Functions  
Editing Marks  
This section describes how to edit marks, assuming that more than one mark is already stored in realtime accord-  
ing to the operations described in "Chapter 2 Basic Recording and Playback".  
Viewing the mark list  
Editing a mark position  
You can edit the current position of a mark in the mark  
map.  
You can view the marks stored.  
While the recorder is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ./  
MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
Themarkpositionsareshownbytimeorbar/beat/clock  
values depending on the time base (In the following  
screen example, the time base is set to "Bar/Beat/Clk").  
While the recorder is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ./  
MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
The Mark map screen appears.  
1
1
Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR up/down] keys to high-  
light the desired mark, and then press the [TIME BASE  
2
SEL/F2] key.  
Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR up/down] keys to scroll  
the marks stored.  
In the Mark map screen, you can not only view all the  
marks but also perform various operations (such as  
editing a mark position, entering a mark title, locating  
a mark, deleting a mark and adding a mark) described  
later.  
2
The display shows the screen for editing the chosen  
mark.  
Blinking  
<Hint>  
When the Mark map screen is shown, you can switch  
the screen to display the position (by time or bar/  
beat/clock) or title of each mark by pressing the  
[TIME BASE SEL] key.  
Use the [CURSOR </>] keys to highlight (and blink) the  
field you want to edit, and then use the [JOG] dial to  
3
select the desired value.  
When the time base is set to "ABS" or "MTC", you can  
edit fields for minute, second, frame and subframe.  
When the time base is set to "Bar/Beat/Clk", you can  
edit fields for bar, beat and clock, as shown below.]  
After viewing the list, press the [EXIT/NO] key.  
The display returns to the Normal screen.  
3
After editing time (or bar/beat/clock), press the [ENTER/  
YES] key.  
The edited value is stored to the mark and the display  
returns to the Mark map screen.  
4
5
Press the [EXIT/NO] key.  
The display returns to the Normal screen.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder Functions  
Enter a mark title  
Adding a mark  
You can enter or edit a title for each mark.  
You can add a mark to the mark map.  
While the recorder is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ./  
1
While the recorder is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ./  
1
MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
The Mark map screen appears.  
The Mark map screen appears.  
Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR up/down] keys to high-  
2
light the desired mark, and then press the [TIME BASE  
SEL/F2] key.  
The display shows the screen for editing the chosen  
mark.  
Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR up/down] keys to high-  
2
light "New Mark", and then press the [TIME BASE SEL/  
F2] key.  
You can find "[New Mark]" at the bottom of the mark map.  
Blinking  
Press the [CURSOR </>] keys repeatedly to highlight  
3
(and blink) the leftmost point of the title field.  
Blinking  
Highlight (and blink) this point.  
On the screen for editing the mark, "001" (Bar number  
field) is blinking, showing that it can be edited.  
The mark name is tentatively set to "Mark", while no  
scene is assigned (indicated by "Non").  
Use the [CURSOR </>] keys to move the highlighted  
4
point among the title field, and use the [JOG] dial to  
select the desired character.  
You can use up to 14 characters for each title but be-  
cause of the screen size, characters displayed at once  
are limited. You can select a character from among the  
following.  
Use the [CURSOR </>] keys to highlight (and blink) the  
3
field you want to edit among BAR, BEAT and CLK, and  
then use the [JOG] dial to select the desired value.  
When setting the time base to ABS or MTC, you can set  
the position in the similar way.  
After setting the mark position, press the [ENTER/YES]  
4
key.  
The new mark is added to the mark map and the dis-  
play returns to the Mark map screen.  
Hint  
When selecting a character, rotating the [JOG] dial  
while holding down the [SHIFT] key jumps among  
characters surrounded with the box above.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key.  
5
The display returns to the Normal screen.  
After entering/editing the title, press the [ENTER/YES]  
5
<Hint>  
key.  
When adding a new mark, you can also enter a mark title  
or assign a scene for the scene sequence function.  
See "Enter a mark title" above and "Scene Memory" in "Mixer  
Functions" for details about operations.  
The entered/edited title is stored to the mark.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key.  
6
The display returns to the Normal screen.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder Functions  
Deleting a mark  
Locating a mark  
You can delete an unnecessary mark.  
You can directly locate a mark.  
While the recorder is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ./  
1
While the recorder is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ./  
MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
The Mark map screen appears.  
1
MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
The Mark map screen appears.  
Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR up/down] keys to high-  
2
Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR up/down] keys to high-  
light the mark you want to locate, and then press the  
[SETUP/F1] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.  
The recorder locates to the selected mark, and the dis-  
play returns to the Normal screen.  
2
light the mark you want to delete, and then press the  
[UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down the [SHIFT]  
key.  
"Delete!" is shown and "Sure?" blinks.  
To cancel the delete operation, press the [EXIT/NO] key.  
<Hint>  
If you press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the  
[SHIFT] key after editing a mark position (see "Editing a  
mark position"), you can locate the new mark position.  
Blinking  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key while holding down the  
3
[RECORD] key.  
The chosen mark is deleted and the mark map is sorted,  
resulting marks following the deleted mark in the mark  
map list move up.  
For example, if you delete Mark 03, the current Mark  
04, 05,... will replace Mark 03, 04,.... respectively.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key.  
4
The display returns to the Normal screen.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Operation  
Advanced Operation  
This chapter describes advanced or useful functions of the VF08.  
Metronome function  
The VF08 provides the internal tempo map, in which you can set the time signature (e.g. 4/4, 3/4) and tempo  
(between 30 and 250).  
It also can output the metronome sound (click) according to the tempo map, allowing you to record materials  
at the specific tempo without the need of an external metronome or rhythm machine.  
The metronome sound can be output from Track 6 of the VF08 when you set "Click?" in the Setup menu to "On."  
<Note>  
When Track 6 is set to output the metronome sound (i.e. when you set "Click?" menu in the Setup menu to "On"),  
you cannot record audio on Track 6 or playback audio recorded on Track 6.  
When you have finished using the metronome function, we recommend setting "Click?" menu in the Setup mode  
to "Off" so that you can use Track 6 for recording and playback.  
Setting the tempo map  
Setting the metronome output  
Youcansetwhetheroutputtingthemetronomesound  
or not by "Click?" menu in the Setup mode.  
To output the metronome sound (click), the tempo  
map must be set.  
Tosetthetempomap, use"SignatureSet"and"Tempo  
Set" menus in the Setup mode.  
Initially, the time signature is set to "4/4" while the  
tempo is set to "120."  
Use the [JOG] dial to select the "Click?" menu, and then  
1
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The initial setting is "Off."  
To change the initial settings, operate the following.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select "On", and then press the  
2
While the VF08 is stopped, press the [SETUP] key to  
1
[ENTER/YES] key.  
enter the Setup mode.  
Now the metronome sound will be output from Track  
6.  
The screen for selecting a menu in the Setup mode ap-  
pears.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key repeatedly until exiting the  
3
Use the [JOG] dial to select the "Signature Set" menu,  
2
Setup mode.  
and then press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The screen for setting the time signature appears.  
Set the desired time signature according to the proce-  
dure described in "Setting the time signature" on page  
99.  
Setting the time base to bar/beat  
After setting the time signature, press the [EXIT/NO]  
3
Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key to set the time base to  
1
key to return to the screen for selecting a menu in the  
Setup mode.  
"Bar/Beat."  
When the time base is set to "Bar/Beat", you can moni-  
tor the current position by Bar/Beat according to the  
tempo map you set.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select the "Tempo Set" menu, and  
4
then press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The screen for setting the tempo appears.  
Set the desired tempo according to the procedure de-  
scribed in "Setting the tempo" on page 101.  
Monitoring the metronome sound  
Press the [PLAY] key to start playback of the VF08.  
1
ThelevelmeterforTrack6showsthemetronomesound  
level.  
After setting the tempo, press the [EXIT/NO] key to  
5
return to the screen for selecting a menu in the Setup  
mode.  
Set the Master and Track 6 faders to the "0" position,  
and raise the [PHONES] knob to monitor the metronome  
sound via the headphones.  
Go on to set the metronome output described below.  
You can now record a material while listening to the  
metronome sound as a guide.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Operation  
Track bounce (Ping-pong recording)  
When the number of empty tracks is short in the recording process, you can solve the problem by transferring  
audio on the multiple already-recorded tracks to a different track or tracks.  
This operation is called "Track bounce" or "Ping-pong recording". With the VF08, you can do this operation sim-  
ply by using the [BOUNCE MODE] key.  
When the Bounce mode is active, Tracks 7/8 are automatically armed and the materials recorded on Tracks 1  
through 6 are ready to be bounced to Tracks 7/8.  
In the following description for track bouncing operation, we assume that mono materials are recorded on Tracks  
1 through 4, while a stereo material is recorded on Tracks 5 and 6.  
<Note>  
On/off of bounce mode  
If the peak indicator lights up, the recorded sound  
will be distorted. Adjust the playback level of each  
track appropriately.  
Press the [BOUNCE MODE] key.  
1
Each press of the key alternates "On" and "Off."  
When set to "On", the key is illuminated, while the  
Bounce screen appears where "Remain" is displayed.  
You can see the playback levels on Tracks 1 through 6,  
input levels on Track 7/8 and output levels of the Ste-  
reo busses (L and R) via the meters on the screen.  
By raising the [PHONES] knob, you can monitor the  
sound.  
Tracks 7/8 are automatically armed and the corre-  
sponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key flashes in  
red.  
When the Bounce mode is active, you cannot arm the  
other tracks (1 through 6).  
After adjusting the levels, stop the recorder and then  
locate the beginning position of track bouncing.  
4
Setting pan positions  
Performing the track bounce  
Press the [PAN] key to set the pan position for each  
1
2
track.  
Press the [PLAY] key while holding down the  
[RECORD] key to start track bouncing.  
The recorder starts recording of mixed audio from  
Tracks 1 through 6 to Tracks 7/8.  
1
2
Set the pan positions at the desired points for Tracks 1  
through 4, fully left for Track 5 and fully right for Track  
6. See "Mixer Functions" for details about the pan set-  
ting.  
After finishing the track bounce, press the [STOP] key  
to stop the recorder.  
Now you can use Tracks 1 through 6 to record  
new materials.  
After setting all pan positions, press the [EXIT/NO] key.  
The balance mode screen appears.  
Setting level of each track  
<Note>  
You can also apply EQ and/or effects to audio signals on  
Tracks 1 through 6 to be bounce to Track 7/8.  
See "Mixer Function" for details about how to apply EQ  
and effects.  
Set the [MASTER] fader to the "0" position.  
1
2
Press the [RECORD] key only.  
The [RECORD] key starts flashing, while Tracks 7/8  
enter the input monitor mode.  
Press the [PLAY] key to start playback and adjust play-  
back levels of Tracks 1 through 6 using the track fad-  
3
ers.  
Be careful not to light up the peak indicator when ad-  
justing the playback level of each track.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Operation  
Training mode  
The VF08 provides the training mode which allows you to practice your instrument while playing back only Tracks  
7/8. In the training mode, you can slow down the playback speed or altering the pitch, making it easy to play  
along with your favorite musicians or transcribing ad-lib phrases.  
You can also cancel the vocal or lead guitar solo which is positioned in the center, allowing you to replace it with  
your vocal or guitar (like a karaoke).  
The following description shows how to play the guitar along with audio recorded on Tracks 7/8.  
INPUT  
BAL  
A
PHES  
ST OUT  
FOOT SW  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
L
R
MIX PARAMETER  
TRACK  
EDIT  
SCENE  
SCENE SEQ.  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
ON/OFF  
ACCESS  
BOUNCE MODE  
2TRK MODE  
TRAINING  
MASTERING  
CH ON/OFF  
CH ON/OFF  
PEAK  
PEAK  
PHANTOM  
F1  
F2  
F3  
RED  
REC  
GREEN  
PLAY  
OFF  
MUTE  
TRACK STATUS  
STATUS  
/SEL  
TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL  
JOG SHUTTLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7/8 2TRK MASTER  
CURSOR  
EXIT  
/NO  
EJECT  
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
ENTER  
/YES  
0
0
TIMEBASE  
SETUP  
F1  
SEL  
UNDO  
/
REDO  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F2  
F3  
SHIFT  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
LOCATE  
WAVE FORM  
SCRUB  
AUTO  
VARI  
PUNCH I/O  
LOOP  
EDIT  
PITCH  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
EDIT  
EDIT  
MARK  
DELETE  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
-  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
LOCATE ABS  
0
LOCATE REC END  
<Hint>  
On/Off of training mode  
Because only Tracks 7/8 can be played back in the Train-  
ing mode, you have to record a song used for your prac-  
tice in advance.  
If you are going to use a song recorded on other tracks,  
it will be a good idea to use the track exchange function  
to move the song to Tracks 7/8.  
Press the [TRAINING] key.  
1
Each press of the key alternates "ON" and "OFF."  
When set to "ON", the [TRAINING] key is illuminated,  
while the display shows the training mode screen.  
Also, when you want to use an external source on CD,  
MD, etc., record it onto Tracks 7/8 digitally using the  
technique described later in "Digital Recording."  
<Caution>  
When copying a copyright material from CD, MD, etc.,  
do not use the copy for any purpose except your prac-  
tice or enjoyment. Any unauthorized use of the copy  
for commercial purpose will constitute infringement  
of such copyright and will render the infringer liable  
to an action at law.  
On the training mode screen, you can set the follow-  
ing. You can use the [CURSOR up/down] key to select  
(highlight) the item to be set.  
<Note>  
When the training mode is active, you cannot make any  
recording, as well as playback Tracks 1 through 6.  
1. Playback speed  
2. Playback pitch  
3. On/Off of the center cancel function  
4. Setting of the cancel position  
5. Low boost setting (for emphasizing the bass  
sound)  
Connecting the instrument and headphones  
Set the [MASTER] fader to the "" position.  
1
2
<Note>  
Connect the instrument and headphones as shown in  
the illustration above.  
You can set the playback speed only while the VF08  
is stopped. The other items can be set both while  
stopped and during playback.  
You may connect the instrument either [INPUT A] or  
[INPUT B].  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Operation  
Slowing down the playback speed  
Setting the cancel position  
You can change the playback speed only while the  
recorder is stopped.  
Using the [CURSOR down] key to highlight the "Can-  
cel Pos" field, and then use the [JOG] dial to set the de-  
1
sired value.  
When "Norm" in the "Play Speed" field is highlighted,  
1
You can select the cancel position from "-99" via "0" to  
"+99" in one step increments.  
Try to find the best position where the sound to be  
cancel gets lowest.  
use the [JOG] dial to select "Half."  
The playback speed is set to half the normal speed and  
the pitch automatically raises one octave.  
To change only the pitch, see the next section.  
To return to the normal speed, use the [JOG] dial to  
2
select "Norm."  
The playback speed returns to the normal speed.  
Boosting the bass sound  
Using the [CURSOR down] key to highlight the "Lo  
Boost" field, and then use the [JOG] dial to set the  
desired value.  
You can select the low boost level from "0" to "10" in  
one step increments.  
1
Changing the pitch  
The following items can be set both while stopped and  
during playback.  
Using the [CURSOR down] key to highlight the "Play  
1
Pitch" field, and then use the [JOG] dial to select the  
desired pitch.  
You can set the pitch within the range of +/- one octave.  
Playing along with the playback sound  
Set the [MASTER] fader to the "0" position.  
1
2
Canceling the center-positioned sound  
Press the [PLAY] key to starts playback of the VF08 and  
raise the Track 7/8 fader gradually.  
You can see the level is going up via the stereo output  
level meters (L and R) on the screen.  
Rotate the [PHONES] knob to adjust the headphones  
level.  
Using the [CURSOR down] key to highlight the "Vo.  
Cancel" field, and then use the [JOG] dial to select  
"ON".  
You can cancel the center-positioned sound such as a  
lead vocal.  
Depending on audio sources, you may not perfectly  
cancel the sound you want to remove because it is not  
exactly center-positioned. In such a case, perform the  
next operation.  
1
3
Play the guitar along with the playback sound of Tracks  
7/8, while adjusting the [TRIM] knob to the appropri-  
ate position where the [PEAK] indicator for the input  
you connect the guitar does not light.  
You can hear both the playback sound of Tracks 7/8  
and your guitar together from the headphones.  
If you move down the Tracks 7/8 fader, you can only  
hear your guitar.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Operation  
Mastering mode  
You can use Tracks 7/8 as the mastering tracks.  
After performing the track bouncing to mix down track signals to Tracks 7/8, you can record the audio signals  
on Tracks 7/8 to an external (analog or digital) master recorder with applying effects for mastering (see the il-  
lustration below).  
You can perform the above operation in the mastering mode, which can be selected by the [MASTERING] key.  
When the mastering mode is active, only Tracks 7/8 can be played back, while the dedicated effects for master-  
ing are available. In the following description, we assume that the stereo mix signals are recorded on Tracks 7/  
8.  
ST OUT L, R  
Digital master recorder  
POWER  
PHANTOM  
ON OFF  
S/P DIF  
OUTPUT  
/
DATA  
INPUT  
MIDI  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
Analog master recorder  
S/P DIF DATAOUTPUT  
You can select a desired preset entry  
from10entriesstoredintheeffectlibrary.  
See "Effect library details" on the next  
page.  
Selecting a program to be played back  
Effect library  
If there are more than one program in the VF08, se-  
lect the desired program to be played back.  
See "Selecting a program" for the operation.  
Adjusts the EQ gain for the high fre-  
quency range within a +/- 18 dB range.  
Freq. and Q: fixed  
High Gain  
On/off of mastering mode  
Adjusts the EQ gain for the middle fre-  
quency range within a +/- 18 dB range.  
Freq. and Q: fixed  
Mid Gain  
EQ  
Press the [MASTERING] key.  
1
Each press of the [MASTERING] key alternates ON and  
OFF of the mastering mode.  
Adjusts the EQ gain for the low fre-  
quency range within a +/- 18 dB range.  
Freq. and Q: fixed  
WhensettingtoON, the[MASTERING]keyisilluminated  
and the following screen is displayed, while the [TRACK  
STATUS/TRACKSEL]keyofTrack7/8andthe[STATUS/  
SEL] key for the master are illuminated in green.  
Low Gain  
Rev Level  
Adjusts the amount of reverb sound be-  
tween 0 and 99.  
Ambience  
Rev Time  
Pre Delay  
Fixed (See “Effect library details” on the  
next page.  
Adjusts the threshold of the compres-  
sor between -50 dB and 0 dB in 1 dB  
steps.  
Threshold  
Ratio  
Selects the compressor ratio from the  
following options.  
:1, 20:1, 10:1, 8:1, 6:1, 5:1, 4:1, 3.5:1,  
3:1, 2.5:1, 2:1, 1,7:1, 1.5:1, 1.3:1, 1.1:1,  
1:1  
The screen example above shows the upper part of the  
mastering effects setting. Pressing the [CURSOR down]  
key scrolls down the setting items. To scroll up, press  
the [CURSOR up] key.  
Compressor  
Adjusts the compressor gain between  
0 dB and +18 dB.  
Gain  
Fixed (See “Effect library details” on the  
next page.  
Atack  
Selects ON or OFF of the copy protec-  
tion for the S/P DIF output signal.  
When set to ON, the flag for limiting a  
digital copy to one generation is set in  
the S/P DIF digital output signal.  
Copy Protect  
The table below shows the items and functions of the  
mastering effects.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Operation  
After setting the recording level, return the VF08 to the  
beginning of the program.  
2
3
<Hint>  
When selecting a desired preset entry from the effect  
library, the initial parameter values of the entry are  
shown on the screen.  
See "Effect library details" on the next page for the de-  
tailed information.  
Start recording of the master recorder and then start  
playback of the VF08.  
The stereo output (L and R) signals are recorded onto  
the master recorder.  
Setting the mastering effects  
4
After finishing recording, stop the both machines.  
Set the [MASTER] fader at the "0" position.  
1
2
<Hint>  
Start playback and move up the Track 7/8 fader gradu-  
ally.  
You can monitor the playback sound of Tracks 7/8 by  
rotating the [PHONES] knob clockwise.  
In the mastering mode, you cannot monitor the play-  
back sound of other tracks even if you move up the  
faders.  
When you record VF08 audio onto a digital master  
recorder via the S/P DIF digital signal, if the copy  
protection ("Cp Protect") is set to "ON", you can limit  
the digital copy from the master to another recorder.  
If you do not want to make digital copies freely from  
the master, set the copy protection to "ON."  
Use the [CURSOR up/down] key to highlight the pa-  
rameter value to be edited, and use the [JOG] dial to  
3
select the desired value.  
You can monitor the tailored sound of Tracks 7/8 in  
realtime.  
Effect library details  
The master effect library provides 10 preset entries  
which can only be used in the mastering mode.  
When applying mastering effects to the sound, you  
can use a desired preset as a starting point of your  
effect setting.  
The following table shows the initial settings of EQ,  
reverb and compressor parameters, as well as the  
major usage for each preset.  
<Hint>  
When any parameter value is changed from the  
initial setting, "E" appears on the right of the preset  
entry name (as shown below), showing that the cur-  
rent setting is different from the initial setting.  
<Comment>  
Basic mastering ef-  
fects.  
L0: FLAT  
Gain  
Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)  
0
0
Can be used for a wide  
range of music genre.  
L-S  
1
EQ Lo  
EQ Mid  
EQ Hi  
400Hz  
1kHz  
On/off of the mastering effects  
0
H-S  
4kHz  
To switch on or off the mastering effects, use the [CUR-  
SOR up/down] key to highlight the ON/OFF icon as  
Ambience  
0 (Rev Level)  
1
Rev Time=1.0s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed  
shown below, and use the [JOG] dial to select "ON" or  
"OFF".  
When "ON" is selected, effected "wet" sound is output.  
When "OFF" is selected, "dry" sound is output.  
Comp THSHD  
-25  
4 : 1  
+10  
Comp Ratio  
Comp Gain  
Atack Time = 8ms : fixed  
<Comment>  
Makes a dry sound  
wet.  
L1:Wet Mix  
Gain  
Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)  
0
0
L-S  
1.0  
EQ Lo  
EQ Mid  
EQ Hi  
400Hz  
1kHz  
Recording onto the master recorder  
+4.0  
H-S  
8kHz  
Stand by the master recorder for recording, and start  
playback of the VF08.  
Ambience  
75 (Rev Level)  
1
Rev Time=0.5s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed  
You have to adjust the recording level now.  
When the recording signal is digitally transferred from  
theVF08totherecorder, becauseadigitalrecorderusu-  
ally does not provide the function for controlling the  
digital input level, you must adjust the recording level  
by controlling the stereo output level of the VF08 us-  
ing the [MASTER] fader.  
Comp THSHD  
-30  
3 : 1  
+10  
Comp Ratio  
Comp Gain  
Atack Time = 5ms : fixed  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Operation  
<Comment>  
Powerful sound.  
<Comment>  
Makes a dark sound  
bright.  
L6: Hard  
L2: Light Mix  
Gain  
Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)  
Gain  
Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)  
0
0
0
L-S  
1
EQ Lo  
EQ Mid  
EQ Hi  
400Hz  
1kHz  
4kHz  
0
L-S  
1.0  
EQ Lo  
400Hz  
1kHz  
0
EQ Mid  
H-S  
EQ Hi  
+4.0  
H-S  
8kHz  
Ambience  
0 (Rev Level)  
Ambience  
0 (Rev Level)  
Rev Time=1.0s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed  
Rev Time=1.0s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed  
Comp THSHD  
-36  
Comp THSHD  
-42  
3 : 1  
+18  
8 : 1  
Comp Ratio  
Comp Gain  
Comp Ratio  
Comp Gain  
+18  
Atack Time = 5ms : fixed  
Atack Time = 10ms : fixed  
<Comment>  
Soulful and energetic  
sound of 70s'.  
<Comment>  
L7: 70s  
L3: Live Mix  
Makes a sound like  
recorded in a small  
live house.  
Gain  
Gain  
Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)  
Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)  
0
0
-6  
0
L-S  
1.0  
EQ Lo  
EQ Mid  
EQ Hi  
L-S  
1
EQ Lo  
EQ Mid  
EQ Hi  
400Hz  
1kHz  
400Hz  
1kHz  
6kHz  
H-S  
LPF-ON  
LPF  
-18  
8kHz  
Ambience  
99 (Rev Level)  
Ambience  
0 (Rev Level)  
Rev Time=0.1s / Pre Dly=30ms : fixed  
Rev Time=1.0s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed  
Comp THSHD  
-20  
1.5 : 1  
+8  
Comp THSHD  
-10  
5 : 1  
Comp Ratio  
Comp Gain  
Comp Ratio  
Comp Gain  
+2  
Atack Time = 5ms : fixed  
Atack Time = 5ms : fixed  
<Comment>  
Makes a sound like  
recorded in a concert  
hall.  
<Comment>  
Suitable for typical  
pop music with vocal.  
L8: Hall  
L4: Pop Mix  
Gain  
Gain  
-3  
Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)  
Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)  
+4  
-4  
-8  
L-S  
1
EQ Lo  
EQ Mid  
EQ Hi  
400Hz  
500Hz  
6kHz  
L-S  
2.0  
EQ Lo  
EQ Mid  
EQ Hi  
400Hz  
500Hz  
-3  
H-S  
H-S  
+2  
4kHz  
Ambience  
80 (Rev Level)  
Ambience  
80 (Rev Level)  
Rev Time=3.0s / Pre Dly=100ms : fixed  
Rev Time=0.7s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed  
-36  
3.5 : 1  
+18  
Comp THSHD  
Comp Ratio  
Comp Gain  
-25  
1.5 : 1  
+5  
Comp THSHD  
Comp Ratio  
Comp Gain  
Atack Time = 10ms : fixed  
Atack Time = 8ms : fixed  
<Comment>  
<Comment>  
Narrow range sound  
by limiting the fre-  
quency range drasti-  
cally.  
L5: Dance  
L9: LO_Fi  
Suitable for a dancing  
floor.Aspeedy sound  
which makes an audi-  
ence excite.  
Gain  
+10  
-18  
Gain  
-18  
Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)  
Freq. (fixed)  
400Hz  
2kHz  
Q (fixed)  
L-S  
3.5  
EQ Lo  
EQ Mid  
EQ Hi  
400Hz  
550Hz  
L-S  
1
EQ Lo  
EQ Mid  
EQ Hi  
+15  
+15  
3.5  
10kHz  
LPF-ON  
LPF  
2kHz  
Ambience  
0 (Rev Level)  
Ambience  
0 (Rev Level)  
Rev Time=1.0s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed  
Rev Time=1.0s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed  
Comp THSHD  
-30  
Comp THSHD  
-25  
5 : 1  
Comp Ratio  
Comp Gain  
: 1  
Comp Ratio  
Comp Gain  
+14  
+5  
Atack Time = 5ms : fixed  
Atack Time = 5ms : fixed  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Operation  
Digital recording  
You can digitally record an external digital source to the VF08, or stereo output signals of the VF08 to an external  
digital recorder. This section describes how to make digital recording between the VF08 and an external digital  
device. Note that the VF08 can only handle S/P DIF format digital data.  
Recording an external source onto the VF08 digitally  
The following describes how to record an external S/P DIF digital source (such as CD, MD and DAT) onto the  
VF08.  
POWER  
PHANTOM  
ON OFF  
S/P DIF  
OUTPUT  
/
DATA  
INPUT  
MIDI  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
Selecting a track to record  
<Important note>  
* When recording a digital source onto the VF08, make  
sure that the source signal is the "44.1 kHz, 16-bit" S/  
P DIF digital format.  
Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of Tracks  
7/8.  
1
The key lighting in green change to flashing in red.  
* You can record an external S/P DIF digital source only  
onto Tracks 7/8 of the VF08. If you want to record it  
onto other tracks, first record it onto Tracks 7/8 and  
then move the data to other tracks using the track ex  
change function.  
Starting to record  
Set the Track 7/8 and Master faders to the "0" position.  
1
2
Start recording of the VF08 by pressing the [PLAY] key  
while holding down the [RECORD] key, and start play-  
back of the external digital device.  
Selecting a program to be recorded  
Whenmorethanoneprogramexists, selectthedesired  
program using the program select function before re-  
cording.  
See "Selecting a program" in "Recorder function"  
about how to select a program.  
"When recording a digital signal, you cannot adjust the  
input level of the VF08." "To get the optimum record-  
ing level, adjust the output level of the source."  
The level meters for Tracks 7/8 on the screen shows  
the input levels.  
<Note>  
During digital recording, the level meters for the  
stereo outputs (L and R) are not active.  
Selecting the digital input  
In the "Digital In" menu of the setup mode, select "On."  
1
Rotating the [PHONES] knob clockwise to monitor the  
source sound.  
3
4
See "Setting digital input" in "Setup mode" about how  
to select "On."  
When set to "On", you can record an incoming S/P DIF  
signal from the [S/P DIF / DATA INPUT] connector onto  
Track 7/8 of the VF08.  
After finishing recording, stop the VF08 by pressing  
the [STOP] key , as well as stop the external digital  
device.  
After setting "Digital In" menu, press the [EXIT/NO] key  
2
to exit the setup mode.  
<Note>  
When receiving a correct S/P DIF digital signal, "DIGI  
IN" is shown steadily on the screen. When a correct  
digital signal is not received, "DIGI IN" blinks on the  
screen. In such a case, check the connection and set-  
tings of the external source device.  
After you have finished the digital recording, return  
the "Digital In" setting to "Off."  
When "On", you cannot record any analog signal  
onto Tracks 7/8.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Operation  
Recording the VF08 stereo output signals digitally onto an external digital device  
Youcanrecordthestereooutputsignaldigitallyontoanexternaldigitaldeviceviathe[S/PDIF/DATAOUTPUT]  
connector.  
You do not have to carry out any special operation for outputting an S/P DIF digital signal from the [S/P DIF/  
DATA OUTPUT] connector, because it is always output there.  
All you have to do for mixing down to an external digital device digitally is to connect the device to the [S/  
P DIF/DATA OUTPUT] connector. You can perform the digital mixdown during the mixdown process described  
in "Mixdown' of the "Basic recording/playback" chapter as well as in the mastering mode described in "Mas-  
tering mode" of this chapter.  
POWER  
PHANTOM  
ON OFF  
S/P DIF  
OUTPUT  
/
DATA  
INPUT  
MIDI  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
MIDI clock sync system  
By setting any desired meter at any desired point of the programmable tempo map contained in the VF08, and  
by output of a MIDI clock and song position pointer according to the setting, a hardware type MIDI sequencer  
can be synchronized as a MIDI clock slave. Consequently, in this system, the VF08 will be the master and the MIDI  
sequencer the slave.  
MIDI clock & song position ponter  
MIDI IN  
MIDI Sound Source  
INPUT  
ST OUT L, R  
MIDI OUT  
PUT  
BAL  
A
ST OUT  
FOOT SW  
UT  
BAL  
B
PHONES  
Master Recorder  
MIX PARAMETER  
TRACK  
EDIT  
SCENE  
SCENE SEQ.  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
MIDI IN  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
MIDI OUT  
ON/OFF  
ACCESS  
BOUNCE MODE  
2TRK MODE  
TRAINING  
MASTERING  
CH ON/OFF  
CH ON/OFF  
PEAK  
PEAK  
PHANTOM  
F1  
F2  
F3  
RED  
REC  
GREEN  
OFF  
MUTE  
PLAY  
TRACK STATUS  
STATUS  
/SEL  
TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL  
MIDI Sequencer  
JOG SHUTTLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7/8 2TRK  
CURSOR  
MASTER  
EXIT  
/NO  
EJECT  
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
ENTER  
/YES  
0
0
TIMEBASE  
SETUP  
F1  
SEL  
UNDO  
/
REDO  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F2  
F3  
SHIFT  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
LOCATE  
WAVE FORM  
SCRUB  
AUTO  
VARI  
PUNCH I/O  
LOOP  
EDIT  
PITCH  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
EDIT  
EDIT  
MARK  
DELETE  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
-  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
LOCATE ABS  
0
LOCATE REC END  
Set the MIDI sequencer for “external sync mode  
2
Connecting external equipment  
(EXTERNAL SYNC) by MIDI clock.”  
Refer to the Owners Manual of the equipment in use  
for details.  
Connect the VF08 MIDI OUT to MIDI IN of the MIDI  
sequencer.  
1
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Operation  
Executing of recording  
Setup of the VF08  
Various ways of recording can be conducted while  
synchronizing the VF08 and the MIDI sequencer with  
the MIDI clock.  
Because the MIDI clock and song position pointer will  
be output from the VF08, set the SETUP mode “MIDI  
sync signal output setting” to “CLK.”  
1
Refer to page “103”, SETUP mode “MIDI sync signal  
output setting” for correct operating procedures.  
Confirming the MIDI clock sync  
During recording and at playback following the  
recording,thetimebase(BAR/BEAT/CLK)isdisplayed  
in accordance to the setup tempo map, and the MIDI  
clock and song position pointer is also output.  
Confirm that the travel position (BAR/BEAT/CLK) of  
the VF08 and the travel position of the synchronized  
MIDI sequencer are matched.  
The meter in the desired bar can be set by “Time  
2
3
4
signature setting” of the SETUP mode.  
Refer to page “99”, SETUP mode “Time Signature  
Setting” for operating procedure.  
Tempo in the desired bar can be set by “Tempo setting”  
of the SETUP mode.  
Refer to page “101”, SETUP mode “Tempo Setting” for  
operating procedure.  
If correct sync cannot be obtained, re-check the  
connections/cables and setting of both equipment.  
Set the SETUP mode “Metronome setting” to “On” if  
click sound is to be output according to the setup  
<Note>  
IntheVF08, theABS0positionissetat-002BAR/1BEAT  
/00CLK.” This setting is made in consideration of the  
time required (it will not sync immediately) for the MIDI  
sequencer, etc. to enter into sync. As a result, if the VF-  
16 is played back from ABS 0 (LOCATE ABS 0), sync will  
be completed by the time it reaches the first bar, and will  
thus synchronize from head of the tune.  
tempo map.  
Refer to page “102”, SETUP mode “Metronome setting”  
for operating procedure.  
Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key, and then change the  
time base display to BAR/BEAT/CLK.  
5
MTC sync/MIDI machine control system  
The following will explain synchronization by the MTC (MIDI time code) output and the computer controlling  
system using MMC (MIDI machine control). In this system, the VF08 will be the master and the computer (with  
sequence software) will be the slave. The VF08 will attach any desired offset (time difference) against ABS time  
(absolute time) and output it as MTC in any desired frame rate. It can also carry out the proper operation upon  
receiving an MMC from outside. In this case, because the VF08 can setup a DEVICE ID number by the SETUP mode  
“MIDI Device ID Setting” menu, a multiple number of the VF08’s can be separately controlled by changing the  
DEVICE ID numbers in the transmitted message from the computer.  
MMC  
MIDI IN  
MIDI Sound Source  
MIDI IN  
MIDI OUT  
INPUT  
BAL  
A
PHONES  
ST OUT  
FOOT SW  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
L
R
ST OUT L, R  
MIX PARAMETER  
TRACK  
EDIT  
SCENE  
SCENE SEQ.  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
MIDI OUT  
MIDI IN  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
ON/OFF  
ACCESS  
BOUNCE MODE  
2TRK MODE  
TRAINING  
MASTERING  
CH ON/OFF  
CH ON/OFF  
PEAK  
PEAK  
Master Recorder  
PHANTOM  
F1  
F2  
F3  
RED  
REC  
GREEN  
PLAY  
OFF  
MUTE  
TRACK STATUS  
STATUS  
/SEL  
Computer System  
with  
MMC/MTC software  
TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL  
JOG SHUTTLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7/8 2TRK MASTER  
CURSOR  
EXIT  
MIDI OUT  
/NO  
EJECT  
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
ENTER  
/YES  
0
0
TIMEBASE  
SETUP  
F1  
SEL  
UNDO  
/
REDO  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F2  
F3  
SHIFT  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
LOCATE  
WAVE FORM  
SCRUB  
AUTO  
VARI  
PUNCH I/O  
LOOP  
EDIT  
PITCH  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
EDIT  
EDIT  
MARK  
DELETE  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
-  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
LOCATE ABS  
0
LOCATE REC END  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Operation  
Connecting to external equipment  
<Notes on MTC related setups>  
By “MTC offset time setting” and “MTC offset mode  
setting,” at what position (ABS 0 or 001BAR/1BEAT/  
00CLK) should the setup MTC (MTC offset time) is to be  
output is set. When setting the start time of the tune in  
the sequence software by these setups, be careful of the  
following points.  
Connect the VF08 MIDI IN/OUT to the computer (with  
MIDI interface) MIDI IN/OUT.  
MMC/MTC complied sequence software is activated in  
the computer.  
1
1
* Offset mode: For ABS  
Setup of external equipment  
If playback is started from ABS 0, since MTC will be  
output starting from the MTC offset time that has been  
set, thestarttimeofthetunesetbythesequencesoftware  
must be set about 3 seconds later from the MTC offset  
time that was setup. This will provide time because the  
sequence software cannot sync immediately after MTC  
is output. For example, if the initial setting of 00h 59m  
57s 00f 00sf” is used, set the start time of the tune to  
“01h 00m 00s 00f.”  
Setup the following in the sequence software.  
* Set to MTC external sync mode (EXTERNAL SYNC).  
* Set for output of MMC.  
* Set to the desired MTC read out frame rate.  
* Set start time of the tune (which MTC time is to be the first  
bar). Refer to precaution in regards to MTC offset, farther  
on.  
If playback is thus started from ABS 0 (LOCATE ABS 0),  
sync will be obtained by the time it reaches the first bar  
and therefore it can be made to sync from the head of  
the tune.  
For details, refer to Owners Manual of the external  
equipment.  
Setup of the VF08  
* Offset mode: For BAR  
As mentioned before, because the “ABS 0” position is set  
at the “002BAR / 1BEAT / 00CLK” position, the setup  
MTCoffsettimecanbesettotheheadofthetunewithout  
taking into account the time until reaching sync, as  
mentioned above. The length of the time two bars  
beforehand will change in accordance to the first bar  
setting for “signature” and “tempo.” For example, it will  
be long if the tempo is set slow. This mode can be  
effectively applied when using the MIDI clock and MTC  
in parallel, and when using MTC for the sync signal while  
controlling the recorder with time base BAR/BEAT/CLK.  
Because MTC will be output from the VF08, set to “MTC”  
1
the SETUP mode “MIDI sync signal output setting.”  
Refer to page “103”, SETUP mode “MIDI sync signal  
output setting” for operating procedure.  
Set a random offset time by the SETUP mode “MTC  
offset time setting.”  
Refer to page “104”, SETUP mode “MTC offset time  
setting” for operating procedure.  
2
3
In the SETUP mode “MTC offset mode setting,” whether  
the MTC offset time setup in Step 2 should be output  
(ABS) at the ABS 00m 00s 00f 00sf position or at the  
Confirming MTC sync/MMC  
001BAR 1BEAT 00CLK (bar, signature) must be  
selected.  
Refer to page “104”, SETUP mode “MTC offset mode  
setting” for operating procedure.  
During recording and at playback after recording, time  
base MTC is displayed according to the setting and MTC  
is output at the same time.  
Check that the VF08 traveling position (MTC) and the  
traveling position of the sequence software in sync are  
matched.  
1
Setup to the same frame rate as that setup by the  
sequence software by “MTC Frame rate setting” of the  
4
5
SETUP mode.  
Refer to page “103”, SETUP mode “MTC Frame rate  
setting” for operating procedure and details.  
2
Send MMC commands such as PLAY, STOP and  
LOCATE from the sequence software to see that the  
VF08 will be properly controlled.  
WhenacorrectMIDIcommand(MMCorFEX)isreceived,  
“MIDI” in the display will be lit for about 40msec.  
There is no setting in the VF08 to receive MMC but it  
will operate if a correct MIDI signal is input.  
Set to the same figure as the sequence software MMC  
device number by the SETUP mode “MIDI device ID  
setting.”  
When the sequence software transmits by “7F,” it means  
“ALL DEVICE” and therefore, it need not be setup.  
Refer to page “108”, SETUP mode “MIDI device ID  
setting” for operating procedure and details.  
If sync and control cannot be done correctly, re-check  
connections/cables and the setting of both equipment.  
Execution of recording  
Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key, and then change the  
time base display to MTC.  
6
Carry out various recordings while synchronizing the  
VF08 and a MIDI sequencer with the MIDI clock.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Operation  
External MIDI equipment sync system by the slave mode  
Up to this point, synchronization with external MIDI equipment has been explained with the VF08 as the master  
and MIDI equipment as the slave but depending on the slave mode setting, the MIDI equipment can be set as the  
master and the VF08 as the slave.  
MTC  
Sound Source  
MIDI IN  
INPUT  
INPUT  
BAL  
A
ST OUT  
FOOT SW  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
PHONES  
L
R
MIX PARAMETER  
SCENE SCENE SEQ.  
TRACK  
EDIT  
GUITAR  
GUITAR  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
PGM  
PAN  
FADER  
EQ  
MAP  
EFFECT  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
MIDI OUT  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
ON/OFF  
ACCESS  
BOUNCE MODE  
2TRK MODE  
TRAINING  
MASTERING  
CH ON/OFF  
CH ON/OFF  
PEAK  
PEAK  
PHANTOM  
F1  
F2  
F3  
RED  
REC  
GREEN  
OFF  
MUTE  
PLAY  
TRACK STATUS  
STATUS  
/SEL  
Computer System  
with  
MMC/MTC software  
TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL  
JOG SHUTTLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7/8 2TRK  
CURSOR  
MASTER  
EXIT  
/NO  
EJECT  
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
0
+6  
+6  
0
ENTER  
/YES  
0
0
TIMEBASE  
SETUP  
F1  
SEL  
UNDO  
/
REDO  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
F2  
F3  
SHIFT  
-10  
-20  
-10  
-20  
LOCATE  
WAVE FORM  
SCRUB  
AUTO  
VARI  
PUNCH I/O  
LOOP  
EDIT  
PITCH  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
-30  
-40  
EDIT  
EDIT  
MARK  
DELETE  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
-  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
-∞  
LOCATE ABS  
0
LOCATE REC END  
Set slave mode to “On” by the SETUP mode “Slave  
mode setting.”  
4
Connection to external equipment  
Refer to page “105”, SETUP mode “Slave mode setting”  
for operating procedure and details.  
Connect MIDI OUT of the computer (with MIDI interface)  
with MIDI IN of the VF08.  
The computer sequence software complying to MMC/  
MTC must be activated.  
1
1
Set slave type to “Vari” by the SETUP mode “Slave type  
setting.”  
Refer to page “105”, SETUP mode “Slave type setting”  
for operating procedure and details.  
5
6
Setup of external equipment  
Sequence software is setup as follows.  
Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key, to change the time  
base display to MTC.  
* Set for output of MTC.  
* Set frame rate of the MTC to be output.  
* Confirm start time of the tune.  
Refer to Owners Manual of the respective equipment  
for details.  
Confirming chase lock  
When the sequence software is played, “CHASE” and  
“MTC” in the display will be light and the chase lock  
1
Setup of the VF08  
will be completed.  
Check that the MTC output by the sequence software  
and MTC time displayed in the VF08 are the same.  
Set to same frame rate as the sequence software by the  
SETUP mode “MTC Frame rate setting.”  
Refer to page “103”, SETUP mode “MTC Frame rate  
setting” for operating procedure and details.  
1
2
3
When the sequence software stops, MTC will be  
interrupted and the VF08 will also stop.  
“CHASE” in the display will change from lit to blinking.  
2
3
Set to the desired mode by the SETUP mode “MTC  
offset mode setting.”  
Refer to page “104”, SETUP mode “MTC offset mode  
setting” for operating procedure and details.  
During FF/REW of the sequence software, the VF08 will  
remain stopped but upon starting to record, the VF08  
will immediately chase lock.  
Should it not be possible to chase lock, re-check  
connections / cables and all settings.  
A random offset time can be set by the SETUP mode  
“MTC offset time setting.”  
Refer to page “104”, SETUP mode “MTC offset time  
setting” for operating procedure and details.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Operation  
Execution of recording  
<Notes>  
* Chase lock of the VF08 by MTC only is permissible  
when speed difference of the MTC from the master is  
within +/- 5.6%.  
Carry out various recordings while the recorder is  
chase locked to the sequence software.  
Against the MTC within this range, variable pitch will  
be constantly applied internally for chasing. Chase  
lock, however, will not function against MTC at a speed  
difference outside this range. Also, when the master  
speed difference is large, it is advised to let the VF08  
learn the master speed by entering PLAY prior to  
recording. By doing so, it will be lock faster from the  
second and later sessions.  
<Precautions at MTC related setups>  
Theposition(ABS0or001BAR/1BEAT/00CLK)whenthe  
setup MTC (MTC offset time) should be output was setup  
by the “MTC offset time setting” and “MTC offset mode  
setting.” In accordance to start time of the tune set by  
the sequence software, setup as explained below.  
* Normally, when “Setup of slave type” is set to “Vari,”  
the VF08 will be constantly controlled by vari-pitch  
and follow the MTC, which is the master.  
However, if the digital input is set to “On” via the SETUP  
mode “Setup of digital input,” it will be in “Word clock  
external sync operation” by the digital signal (S/P DIF)  
that is input.  
Therefore, it must be noted that when “Setup of digital  
input” is executed, even though “Setup of slave type”  
is set to “Vari,” it will not follow by application of vari-  
pitch and upon completion of lock, it will change to  
external sync operation by the digital input signal.  
Offset mode: For ABS  
Set the MTC offset time about three seconds prior to the  
start time of the tune set by the sequence software.  
Because the recorder cannot immediately chase lock  
after input of MTC, in order to sync the unit from head  
of the tune, set the preroll using the sequence software,  
and playback from before the actual head of the tune to  
allow the recorder to enter into sync by the time it arrives  
at the head of the tune.  
Offset mode: For BAR/BEAT  
The MTC offset time can be set to the same time as the  
start time of the tune set by the sequence software.  
Because the “ABS 0” position is set at the “0002BAR/  
1BEAT/00CLKpositionintheunit, asmentionedbefore,  
the preceding time required for sync is already set.  
The preceding time of two bar lengths could change in  
length depending on the first bar’s “signature setting”  
and “tempo setting” mentioned before. For example, it  
will be longer if the tempo is slowed down.  
<One Point Advice>  
Sync signal “Vari” of the “Slave mode setting” menu:  
When the VF08 is made to chase lock by MTC only,  
variable pitch will be constantly applied by external  
MTC. If a digital signal is output to an external digital  
equipment from the VF08, it will not be able to follow  
the speed difference (MTC speed difference of the  
master) of the VF08 and the external digital equipment,  
in some cases, may not be able to input a continuous  
digital signal.  
As a counter measure, the sync signal should be set to  
“Free” by the “Slave mode setting” menu. Using this  
setting, the VF08 will enter self operation by the internal  
clock, after completion of chase lock, and it will be  
possible to supply a stable digital signal to the external  
equipment.  
Under this setting, when MTC drift between the master  
recorder and slave recorder exceeds 10 frames, the VF08  
will assume that chase lock has been disengaged and the  
slave recorder will carry out position matching again  
with the master unit (re-chase operation). During the  
re-chase operation, sound output will be muted and the  
digital signal will also be interrupted.  
If it is within 10 frames, the slave recorder will continue  
to run while admitting this drift.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save/Load of Song data  
Save/Load of song data  
You can save or load song data (including audio and setup data) using a digital audio recorder via the S/P DIF  
digital signal, as well as using a SCSI backup device.  
This function allows you to save finished or unfinished song data to a digital recorder or a SCSI backup device,  
and load the data later.  
******About song data******  
There are two methods of saving/loading song data depending on the digital signals used to handle the  
data, which are S/PDIF digital and SCSI. The data format and time required for the save/load operations  
are different between each method.  
•Using the S/PDIF digital signal (you can save/load data for each program individually.):  
Following to five seconds of the pilot signal (shown in gray in the diagram below), the song data is output to an  
external digital audio device such as a DAT recorder.  
The audio data is divided into data blocks of track pairs (shown in black in the diagram below) and transferred. To  
save data for Real tracks 1 through 8, 4 two-track data are transferred. To save all tracks including the Additional  
tracks in addition to the Real tracks, 12 two-track data are transferred. Therefore, it will take about 4 times as much  
as the recorded time of a program (from ABS 0 to REC END) to save the Real tracks 1 through 8 of the program, while  
it will take about 12 times to save all the data including the Additional tracks.  
When loading song data from the external device to the VF08 via the S/PDIF digital signal, data is transferred with  
two-track data blocks, as with the same way as saving data from the VF08 to the external device. (See also <Notes>  
on the next page.)  
Trk 23&24  
Trk 3&4  
Trk 21&22  
Trk 1&2  
Program 2 (P02)  
Program 1 (P01)  
Program 99 (P99)  
•Using a SCSI disk (you can save/load data for each program individually.):  
See the following <Note>.  
When using a SCSI disk, all audio data including both the Real and Additional tracks (shown in black in the diagram  
below) is transferred simultaneously. Therefore, you can save or load a program much faster than using the S/PDIF  
signal. Note that no pilot tone or beep sound is recorded when saving data to a SCSI disk. If song data to be saved  
requires more space than the available disk space, you can save the data to more than one disk (up to 99 disks). You  
can also save/load data to/from a DOS formatted disk by the WAV file format. In the save/load operation using the  
WAV file, you can specify any track(s) to be saved or loaded, as well as all tracks.  
Trk 1 & 2 & 3 & 4 & 5 & 6 &7  
& 8 & 9 & 10 & 11 & 12 & 13  
& 14 & 15 & 16 & 17 & 18 &  
19 & 20 & 21 & 23 & 24  
Program 2 (P02)  
Program 1 (P01)  
Program 99 (P99)  
<Note>  
To save/load using a SCSI disk, you must install the optional SCSI card (Model  
8340) in the VF08.  
For the detailed information about the SCSI card, contact your dealer or the nearest  
FOSTEX sale office. See last page about how to install the SCSI card in the VF08.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save/Load of Song data  
<Items that can be saved or loaded as song data>  
•Memory data:  
AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT data and Start/End/To points,  
Scene memories 00 through 99, Marks 00 through 99 (only can be saved/loaded using SCSI)  
•Timebase:  
ABS, MTC or BAR/BEAT/CLK  
•Setup mode:  
Bar/beat setting, tempo setting, metronome on/off, preroll time, MIDI synchronization output signal  
setting, MTC offset time, MTC offset mode, REC protect setting, slave mode on/off, and slave type setting  
Fader fix mode setting, fader recall mode setting  
<Items that cannot be saved or loaded as song data>  
•On/off settings for auto play mode and auto return mode  
•Vari pitch on/off and pitch data  
•Setup mode:  
DIGITAL IN and DIGITAL OUT settings, bar/beat resolution on/off and device ID  
<Notes for digital audio recorders to be used>  
The VF08 song data only can be saved to or loaded from digital recorders that can handle 16 bit, 44.1 kHz  
linear digital data with S/PDIF format (such as DAT recorders).  
<Notes for saving data using the S/PDIF digital signal>  
When saving all data including both real and  
Additional track data using the S/PDIF digital  
signal, note the following.  
Only the data recorded within the time duration  
between ABS 0 and REC END of the Real tracks is  
Real Tracks  
saved. Therefore, if the recorded time of Additional  
tracks is longer than the Real tracks, only the  
Additional track data within the time duration  
between ABS 0 and REC END of the Real tracks is  
Save  
saved.  
DAT or adat  
In the example shown on the right, the Additional  
Additional  
tracks have data from "00m 00s" to "10m 00s",  
Tracks  
while the Real tracks have data from "00m 00s" to  
"07m 00s".  
If you are going to save all tracks, the Additional  
track data from "00m 00s" to "07m 00s" will be  
saved but the rest will not be saved.  
In such a case, you can solve the problem by setting  
seven minutes  
REC END (10m 00s)  
of additional track  
the time length of saved data to 10 minutes by  
using the "Save Length" screen mentioned later  
(see "step 4" on page 83). Note that the maximum  
save length is 59 minutes 59 seconds.  
REC END (07m 00s)  
of real track  
The other way to solve the problem is to exchange  
the Additional track data and the Real track data  
before saving data. You should be careful not to  
lose the Additional track data in this operation.  
See page 63 about the track exchange operation.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save/Load of Song data  
Saving data using the S/PDIF digital signal  
You can save data using the S/PDIF digital signal via the [S/P DIF DATA OUTPUT] (coaxial) jack.  
*Use an external digital recorder that supports 44.1 kHz sampling frequency (the same as the VF08).  
Saving data  
Connecting to an external digital recorder  
Connect the [S/P DIF DATA OUTPUT] jack to the  
digital input jack of the external digital recorder  
(DAT, etc.).  
You can save data via the "Save PGM" menu in the  
setup mode.  
<Details about "Save PGM" menu>  
•Output signal options: S/PDIF and SCSI  
•Program options: P01 to P99 (an individual Program)  
•Track options:  
When using S/PDIF:  
Tracks 1-8, Tracks 1-16, Tracks 1-24, Tracks 9-16, Tracks 9-24  
or Tracks 17-24.  
<Note>  
Do not do anything, such as unplug the connecting  
cable, that interrupts the digital signal until the saving  
operation is completed. Otherwise, the unit may  
generates a noise which damages an external recorder.  
VF08  
When using a SCSI disk:  
All tracks (1-24) is selected automatically. (You can select tracks  
individually when saving by the WAV file format).  
POWER  
PHANTOM  
ON OFF  
S/P DIF  
OUTPUT  
/
DATA  
INPUT  
MIDI  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
S/P DIF DATA OUTPUT  
Press the [SETUP] key to enter the setup mode.  
1
The display shows the screen for selecting the setup  
menu.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select "Save PGM" and press  
2
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display shows the screen for selecting the device  
to which the data is saved. "SCSI" blinks.  
Digital equipment  
• If your digital recorder only provide the optical digital  
input jack and does not provide the coaxial jack, use  
the optional COP-1 (optical/coaxial converter).  
• Do not connect digital signals for both directions  
between the VF08 and the external recorder (i.e. the  
digital output of the VF08 to the digital input of the  
external recorder and the digital output of the external  
recorder to the digital input of the VF08), which may  
form a digital loop and cause feedback.  
Setting the external recorder  
Blinking  
Set the sampling frequency to 44.1 kHz (the same as  
the VF08).  
1
Set the input source to "digital input" to accept the  
signal from the VF08.  
Some machine also needs to select the clock reference  
to "external" when setting the input source to "digital  
input". See the operation manual of the machine for  
the detailed information.  
2
"SCSI" should be selected when saving or loading data via  
"SCSI."  
Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR] keys to select  
3
"SPDIF" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display shows the screen for selecting the program  
to be saved.  
<Note>  
If you cannot hear the input signal or you hear  
digital noise when monitoring the source signal of  
the external digital recorder, check the connections,  
cables and settings of both the VF08 and the external  
recorder.  
The program number currently selected blinks, while  
the data size of the program is shown. While a program  
number is blinking, you can select the desired program  
to be saved.  
*See the operation manual of the external recorder for the  
detailed information.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save/Load of Song data  
<Note>  
When you save tracks including Additional tracks,  
read <Notes for saving data using the S/PDIF digital  
signal> on page XX before executing the save  
operation.  
Blinking  
After selecting tracks, press the [ENTER/YES] key  
again.  
7
Use the [JOG] dial to select the program to be saved  
and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display shows "Rec Start Recorder!" together with  
the program and tracks to be saved, and "Sure?" blinks.  
If you are sure to start saving data to the recorder, go  
on to the next step.  
4
The display shows the "Save Length" screen.  
Initially, the recorded time length of the selected  
program (ABS 00 to REC END) is shown as the time  
length of data saving. Normally you do not need to  
edit the length but you may edit it to the desired value  
if needed.  
Blinking  
After checking all preparations on the external  
8
9
recorder are made, start it recording.  
It may be a good idea to put a Start-ID (for DAT) or  
set a locate memory at the starting position so that  
you can easily find the position when you load the  
data later.  
For example, if the actual recorded time is 9 min. 00  
sec., you can make the length of the data to be saved  
shorter or longer than 9 min. 00 sec., as long as the  
length does not exceed 59 min.59 sec.  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key immediately after the  
external recorder starts recording.  
The initially displayed value here is the length of the  
Real track, therefore, as noted earlier, you may edit  
the value to match the length of the Additional track  
if it is longer.  
The display shows something like the one below. After  
a few seconds, the unit starts saving the data and "Wait  
time" starts counting down.  
To edit the save length  
Use the [CURSOR] keys to move the blinking field  
between "minutes" and "seconds".  
Use the [JOG] dial to set the value for the blinking  
field.  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display shows the screen for selecting tracks to  
be saved.  
5
For the first several seconds, the VF08 transmits the  
pilot signal that will be a reference for locating the  
tape position during the load operation, and the actual  
data saving starts from the position at which "Wait  
time" starts counting down.  
Blinking  
Data is saved in 2-track unit. When the data saving is  
completed, "Completed!" appears on the screen and  
the VF08 stops.  
<Note>  
Select tracks to be saved.  
Use the [CURSOR] keys to move the blinking field  
between "From" and "To".  
6
If you interrupts saving before completing, the saved  
data is invalid.  
Use the [JOG] dial to set the track number for the  
blinking field.  
Stop the external recorder.  
10  
11  
For the "From" field, you can select from 1, 9 and 17.  
For the "To" field, you can select a higher value than  
the "From" field value among 8, 16 and 24.  
Accordingly, you can set "Save Track Area" to one of  
the following.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key)  
repeatedly until exiting the setup mode.  
To cancel each operation or to return to the previous  
screen before pressing the [ENTER/YES] key, press the  
[EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key). Each press of the  
key returns to the previous screen level and finally exits  
the setup mode.  
"From 1 To 8", "From 1 to 16", "From 1 To 24", "From  
9 To 16", "From 9 To 24", and "From 17 To 24"  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save/Load of Song data  
Loading data using the S/PDIF signal  
You can load data using the S/PDIF digital signal via the [S/P DIF DATA INPUT] (coaxial) jack.  
*Use an external recorder that supports 44.1 kHz sampling frequency (the same as the VF08).  
Connecting to an external recorder  
Loading data  
Connect the [S/P DIF DATA INPUT] jack to the digital  
output jack of the external digital recorder.  
You can load data via the "Load PGM" menu in the  
setup mode.  
<Details about "Load PGM" menu>  
•Input signal options: S/PDIF and SCSI  
•Program options: P01 to P99 (an individual Program)  
•Track options:  
When using S/PDIF:  
Tracks 1-8, Tracks 1-16, Tracks 1-24, Tracks 9-16, Tracks 9-24  
or Tracks 17-24.  
<Note>  
Do not do anything, such as unplug the coaxial cable,  
that interrupts the digital signal until the loading  
operation is completed. Otherwise, the unit may  
generates a noise which damages an external recorder.  
When using a SCSI disk:  
All tracks (1-24) is selected automatically. (You can select tracks  
individually when saving by the WAV file format).  
VF08  
POWER  
PHANTOM  
ON OFF  
S/P DIF  
OUTPUT  
/
DATA  
INPUT  
MIDI  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
Press the SETUP key to enter the setup mode.  
1
The display shows the screen for selecting the setup  
menu.  
S/P DIF DATA INPUT  
Use the [JOG] dial to select "Load PGM" and press  
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
2
The display shows the screen for selecting the recorder  
from which the data is loaded. "SCSI" blinks.  
Digital Equipment  
• If your digital recorder only provide the optical digital  
input jack and does not provide the coaxial jack, use  
the optional COP-1 (optical/coaxial converter).  
• Do not connect digital signals for both directions  
between the VF08 and the external recorder (i.e. the  
digital output of the VF08 to the digital input of the  
external recorder and the digital output of the external  
recorder to the digital input of the VF08), which may  
form a digital loop and cause feedback.  
Blinking  
Setting the external recorder  
Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR] keys to set "Load  
Device Select" to "SPDIF" and press the [ENTER/YES]  
key.  
3
Make preparations of the external recorder for  
outputting the digital signal.  
1
The display shows the screen for selecting a load  
destination program to which data is loaded.  
A program number currently selected blinks, followed  
by its program name. The data size of the current  
program is also shown. When a program number is  
blinking, you can select the desired load destination  
program.  
Locate the beginning of the pilot signal for the song  
data.  
2
*See the operation manual of the external recorder for the  
detailed information.  
Blinking  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save/Load of Song data  
You can select a load destination program from existing  
programs on the current drive as well as "New PGM".  
When selecting "New PGM", a new program is created.  
When the VF08 is locking to the digital input signal,  
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display shows "Play Start Player!".  
7
*If you load data to a program in which data is  
already recorded, the newly loaded data overwrites  
the current data track by track. Consequently, on  
each overwritten track, the loaded data becomes  
valid while the current data is erased.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select the program to which  
4
data is loaded and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display shows the screen for selecting tracks to  
be loaded.  
Start playback of the external recorder.  
After reading the pilot signal recorded when saving  
the data, the data starts loading automatically.  
When starts loading, the display shows something like  
the one below, in which "Wait time" starts counting  
down.  
8
Blinking  
Select tracks to be loaded.  
Use the [CURSOR] keys to move the blinking field  
between "From" and "To".  
5
Use the [JOG] dial to set the track number for the  
blinking field.  
For the "From" field, you can select from 1, 9 and 17.  
For the "To" field, you can select from 8, 16 and 24.  
For example, if you select "From 1 to 24", data for all  
tracks (1 to 24) will be loaded.  
Data is loaded in 2-track unit.  
While loading, the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys  
for channels 1 and 2 flash, while the input levels are  
displayed by level meters 1 and 2.  
When the data loading is completed, "Completed!"  
appears on the screen.  
After selecting tracks, press the [ENTER/YES] key  
6
again.  
<Note>  
The display shows something like the one below. A  
load destination program (existing or new program)  
to which the data is loaded and tracks to be loaded  
are shown, while "Sure?" blinks.  
If you quit loading before completing, the loaded  
data is invalid.  
Stop the external recorder.  
9
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key)  
repeatedly until exiting the setup mode.  
10  
Blinking  
To cancel each operation or to return to the previous  
screen before pressing the [ENTER/YES] key, press the  
[EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key). Each press of the  
key returns to the previous screen level and finally exits  
the setup mode.  
<Note>  
In the above step, if the VF08 does not lock to the  
digital signal from the external digital recorder, the  
following warning message appears on the display,  
showing that the VF08 does not receive a correct S/  
PDIF digital signal. So check the cable connection and  
the digital output setting of the external digital  
recorder.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save/Load of Song data  
Saving/loading data using SCSI  
If you install the optional SCSI card (Model 8340) in the VF08, you can save/load song data using a SCSI backup disk.  
A backup SCSI disk can be formatted by the Fostex backup format (FDMS-3) from the VF08, however, you can  
also save data to or load data from a WEV file on a SCSI disk formatted by the DOS format (for computer use).  
Since song data written in a WAV file can be read by a computer, as well as can be loaded to the VF08, you can  
use the data with a music software.  
<Notes>  
Connecting to an external device  
• A write-protected disk cannot be used. Release the  
protection before using.  
After installing the Model 8340 SCSI card, connect  
the SCSI connector on the card (half pitch 25-pin  
• The disk formatted by the VF08 can be used for  
type for Macintosh) to an external SCSI device.  
saving/loading by the FDMS-3 format.  
The VF08 cannot DOS-format a disk for saving/loading  
by a WEV file. So, to DOS-format a disk, use a personal  
computer, etc.  
<Notes>  
• Make connection with the power turned off.  
• You can connect only one SCSI device via the SCSI  
connector of Model 8340 SCSI card.  
After connecting a backup SCSI device to the VF08,  
turn on the both machine.  
1
When connecting a external SCSI device to the Model  
8340 SCSI card, insert a SCSI terminator to the other  
(unused) SCSI connector of the device. Or, if the device  
provides a switch that switches the SCSI termination,  
set it to ON.  
Insert a backup disk into the SCSI device.  
2
3
Press the [SETUP] key to enter the setup mode.  
The display shows the screen for selecting the setup  
menu.  
• There is no limitation for the ID number of the backup  
SCSI device. The unit automatically recognizes the  
device as a backup SCSI device.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select "Disk Format" and press  
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display shows the screen for selecting a drive.  
"IDE" (E-IDE hard disk) blinks.  
4
• You must format the disk used with the backup SCSI  
device after connecting the device.  
See "Formatting a backup disk" below for the detail  
information.  
Blinking  
Use the [CURSOR] keys to select (blink) "SCSI" and  
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
5
SCSI cable  
The display shows the name of the SCSI device  
connected, and "Sure?" blinks.  
SCSI device such as zip and MO drive  
Blinking  
Formatting a backup disk  
You can use an unformatted disk or disk currently  
used for a computer, etc.  
<Note>  
When formatting a disk currently used for a  
computer, make sure that you do not need the data  
recorded on the disk. Once you start formatting, you  
cannot stop or cancel formatting. The following  
procedure assumes that a removable disk is used.  
The backup format of the VF08 is "Backup Format 16  
bit." You cannot save VF08 song data to a disk formatted  
with 24-bit format by the Fostex D824 or D1624. If  
you set such a 24-bit formatted disk to the SCSI device,  
the VF08 display will show "Backup Format 24bit". Use  
only a 16-bit formatted disk.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save/Load of Song data  
While holding down the [RECORD] key, press the  
[ENTER/YES] key.  
The unit starts formatting the backup disk.  
When formatting is completed, "Completed!" appears  
on the screen.  
6
7
Blinking  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key)  
repeatedly until exiting the setup mode.  
While "FDMS3" is blinking, press the [ENTER/YES]  
key.  
4
The display shows the screen for selecting a program  
to be saved.  
The program number currently selected blinks, while  
the data size of the program is shown.  
A backup SCSI disk is formatted and ready to be  
used for data saving/loading by the FDMS-3.  
If you continue to format another disk, remove the  
current disk and repeat the procedure above.  
To remove a disk, press the EJECT key on the SCSI  
device.  
<Hint>  
If you select the backup mode to "WAV" and press the  
[ENTER/YES] key while a disk formatted by the FDMS-3  
is set, the display shows "Warning Illegal Disk!" and the  
disk is ejected.  
Saving data to a SCSI disk  
You can save data via the "Save PGM" menu in the  
setup mode.  
When saving to a SCSI disk, you can save data for  
each specified program like saving to an audio  
recorder using the S/PDIF signal.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select a program to be saved.  
5
Depending on a program selected, the display shows  
as below.  
• When selecting a vacant program (no data is  
recorded):  
"0MB" is shown.  
<Details about "Save PGM" menu>  
•Output signal options: S/PDIF and SCSI  
•Program options: P01 to P99 (an individual Program)  
•Track options:  
When using S/PDIF:  
Tracks 1-8, Tracks 1-16, Tracks 1-24, Tracks 9-16, Tracks 9-24  
or Tracks 17-24.  
Blinking  
When using a SCSI disk:  
All tracks (1-24) is selected automatically. (You can select tracks  
individually when saving by the WAV file format).  
<Notes>  
• When selecting a program that can be saved to a  
single backup disk:  
The example below shows"68 MB".  
This means the data size of the data is 68 MB and the  
data can be saved to a single disk.  
When saving a single program data to more than one  
removable disk, we suggest to put a number on each  
disk in the saving order so that you will easily know  
the order when loading the data later.  
Press the [SETUP] key to enter the setup mode.  
1
The display shows the screen for selecting the setup  
menu.  
Blinking  
Use the [JOG] dial to select "Save PGM" and press  
2
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display shows the screen for selecting the device  
to which the data is saved. "SCSI" blinks.  
• When selecting a program that needs more than one  
backup disk for saving.  
The example below shows "2 Disks 130 MB".  
This means the data size of the data is 130 MB and you  
need two disks to save the data.  
Blinking  
Blinking  
While "SCSI" is blinking, press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
3
The display shows the screen for selecting the backup  
mode (FDMS 3 or WAV). If a disk formatted by the  
FDMS-3 is set, "FDMS3" blinks.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save/Load of Song data  
The first disk is ejected when it becomes full, and  
"Insert Disk2!" blinks on the screen.  
Inserting the second disk to the SCSI device  
automatically resumes saving.  
If more than two disks are required for saving, repeat  
the same procedure as above.  
After selecting the program, press the [ENTER/YES]  
key.  
The display shows the difference screens depending  
on whether or not the program can be saved to a single  
disk, as below.  
6
•When the program can be saved to a single disk:  
The display shows the screens for creating a new  
program on the backup disk (the program number  
"B01" is shown for the backup disk) and "Sure?" blinks.  
When the save operation to all disks is completed,  
"Completed!" appears on the display, while the VF08  
stops.  
<Note>  
You cannot abort the save operation before  
completed, unlike the save operation using the S/  
PDIF signal. Especially during the save operation  
to more than one disk, if you happen to press the  
[EXIT/NO] key while removing or inserting a disk,  
you have to redo the save operation from the  
beginning using the first disk.  
Blinking  
Blinking  
Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key in the above condition  
starts saving and the screens shown below appears.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key)  
repeatedly until exiting the setup mode.  
7
<Hint>  
• To remove the disk from the SCSI drive after the save  
operation is completed, press the eject key on the SCSI drive.  
While "B01: New PGM" is blinking, you can select  
"Eject" for the forced eject by using the [JOG] dial.  
When you remove the disk forcibly, select "Eject"  
and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The disk will be  
ejected and "Insert Disk" will blink on the display.  
The screen above shows that the VF08 is saving the  
song data of program 01 to B01 on the backup disk.  
The remaining data size shown on the screen counts  
down while the data save goes on. Wait for a while  
until the save operation is completed.  
When the save operation is completed, the display  
changes to something like the one as shown below,  
while the VF08 stops.  
• When the program requires more than one disk for  
saving:  
Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key immediately starts  
saving to the first disk and the "Data Saving" screen,  
same as described above, appears.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save/Load of Song data  
<Hint>  
•In the saving operation using more than one disk, if  
The save operations described above (both for using a  
single disk and multiple disks) are assumed that backup  
disks used are newly formatted and have no recorded  
data. It will be ideal to prepare newly formatted "clean"  
disks before the save operation, however, there must  
be some cases where you have to use disks containing  
recorded data or unformatted disks.  
you use a disk in which save data is already recorded:  
When carrying out step 6 above, an existing program  
number is shown. In this condition, by using the [JOG]  
dial, you can select "Eject", as well as existing programs.  
To eject the disk, select "Eject" and press the [ENTER/  
YES] key.  
If you save data to the disk, select any existing program  
and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
See the following notes for such a case.  
The display shows "Del All" and "Sure?" (blinking) as  
below.  
• If you are going to save to an unformatted disk:  
The VF08 recognizes that the disk is "unformatted" after  
executing steps 1 through 4 described above, and the  
following screen appears.  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key while the above screen is  
shown.  
All backup data recorded in the disk are erased and  
then the save operation starts.  
By pressing the [ENTER/YES] key while holding down  
the [RECORD] key, the disk is formatted and the display  
shows the screen for selecting the program to be saved,  
as described above.  
• If you select a program to be saved to the backup  
disk which has saved data:  
Loading from a single SCSI disk  
After executing steps 1 through 6 described above, the  
display shows the screen for selecting the program to  
be saved. You can select from existing programs on  
the backup disk and "New PGM".  
If you select an existing program and execute the save  
operation, the new data overwrites the program (the  
existing data is erased). If you select "New PGM", the  
data is saved to a newly created program, while other  
existing programs are unchanged.  
You can load data using the "Load PGM" menu in  
the setup mode. The following procedure shows how  
to load song data saved to a single SCSI disk. See the  
next section for loading data saved to more than  
one SCSI disk.  
<Details about "Load PGM" menu>  
•Input signal options: S/PDIF and SCSI  
•Program options: P01 to P99 (an individual Program)  
•Track options:  
When using S/PDIF:  
Tracks 1-8, Tracks 1-16, Tracks 1-24, Tracks 9-16, Tracks 9-24  
or Tracks 17-24.  
When using a SCSI disk:  
All tracks (1-24) is selected automatically. (You can select tracks  
individually when saving by the WAV file format).  
• If you are going to save data to "New PGM" but the  
disk does not have enough available space for the  
data:  
When you select "New PGM", the available disk space  
is shown. If you press the [ENTER/YES] key, "Disk Full!"  
is shown at the top of the screen and you cannot execute  
the save operation. In such a case, you may save data  
by overwriting an existing program. If you want to  
cancel the save operation, select "Eject" by using the  
[JOG] dial and then press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
Press the [SETUP] key to enter the setup mode.  
1
The display shows the screen for selecting the Setup  
menu.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select "Load PGM" and press  
2
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display shows the screen for selecting the device  
from which the data is loaded. "SCSI" blinks.  
• If you are going to save data to a disk that is used as  
the current drive by another digital recorder:  
After executing steps 1 through 4 described above,  
"Wrong Disk!" is shown and then the screen for  
prompting to format the disk shown above appears.  
you may format the disk by pressing the [ENTER/YES]  
key while holding down the [RECORD] key, or cancel  
the save operation by selecting "Eject" and then  
pressing the [ENTER/YES] key.  
Blinking  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save/Load of Song data  
While "SCSI" is blinking, press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display shows the screen for selecting the  
program to be loaded.  
The backup number currently selected blinks, while  
the data size of the program is shown. While a backup  
number is blinking, you can select the desired  
program to be loaded. If a disk has more than one  
program saved, you can select the desired program  
by using the [JOG] dial.  
3
<Note>  
You cannot abort the load operation before  
completed using SCSI, unlike the load operation  
using the S/PDIF signal.  
When the load operation is completed, "Completed!"  
appears, while the VF08 stops.  
Blinking  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key)  
repeatedly until exiting the setup mode.  
6
• You can also select "Eject" as well as programs to be loaded  
in the condition above. To eject the disk, press the [ENTER/  
YES] key after selecting "Eject".  
Loading from more than one disk  
Use the [JOG] dial to select the program to be loaded  
and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display shows the screen for selecting the  
destination program to which data is loaded.  
In the default setting, "New PGM" is selected so that  
the data is loaded to a newly created program.  
4
The following procedure shows how to load song  
data saved to two SCSI disks.  
Insert the first disk (Disk-1) to the SCSI device.  
1
Carry out the same procedures as steps 1 through 3  
2
described in the previous section "Loading from a  
single disk".  
The display shows the screen for selecting a program  
loaded.  
If the program is saved over more than one disks,  
backup file number "B01" blinks, as well as the  
recorded data size is shown.  
You can select any existing program available on the  
current drive by rotating the [JOG] dial besides "New  
PGM". When selecting an existing program, the data  
size of the program is also shown.  
Blinking  
When you load the data to any existing program, the  
backup data overwrites the existing data.  
If you do not like to overwrite any track, select "New  
PGM".  
<Note>  
• By using the [JOG] dial in this step, you can select "Eject"  
as well as destination programs. To eject the disk, select  
"Eject" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
If the current drive disk (destination disk of loading  
data) does not have enough available space for  
accepting the loaded data, The display shows "Disk  
Full" and the returns to the screen shown when  
carrying out step 3.  
<Note>  
If Disk-2 (the second disk when saving) is inserted  
in mistake, the VF08 automatically recognized that  
the wrong disk is set. The display shows "Wrong  
Disk", followed by "Illegal No!", and the disk is  
automatically ejected. Then, as the display shows  
"Insert Disk", insert Disk-1.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select the load destination  
program and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The data load to the selected program starts.  
The following screen example shows that the "B01"  
data on the backup disk is now being loaded to "P02"  
on the current disk. As the data load goes on, the  
remaining data size shown on the screen counts down.  
5
Press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
3
The display shows the screen for selecting the  
destination program to which data is loaded.  
In the default setting, "New PGM" is selected so that  
the data is loaded to a newly created program.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save/Load of Song data  
When the load operation is completed, "Completed!"  
appears, while the VF08 stops.  
Blinking  
You can select any existing program available on the  
current drive by rotating the [JOG] dial besides "New  
PGM".  
When selecting an existing program, the data size of  
the current program is also shown.  
<Note>  
You cannot abort the load operation using SCSI  
before completed, unlike the load operation using  
the S/PDIF signal.  
When you select load data to an existing program,  
the backup data overwrites the existing data.  
If you do not like any track to be overwritten, select  
"New PGM".  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key)  
repeatedly until exiting the setup mode.  
6
<Note>  
If the current drive disk (destination disk of loading  
data) does not have enough available space for  
accepting the loaded data, The display shows "Disk  
Full" and the returns to the screen shown when  
carrying out step 3.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select the load destination  
4
program and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The data load to the selected program starts.  
The display changes to something like the screen  
below. As the data load goes on, the remaining data  
size shown on the screen counts down.  
After completing the data load from Disk-1, the display  
shows "Insert Disk 2", while Disk-1 is automatically  
ejected.  
Insert Disk-2 (the second disk) to the SCSI device  
according to the display message.  
5
In a while after inserting the disk, the VF08  
automatically starts loading data from Disk-2. The  
screen looks similar to the one when loading Disk-1.  
As the data load goes on, the remaining data size  
shown on the screen counts down.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save/Load of Song data  
Save/load a WAV file  
Song data can be saved to or load from a SCSI disk by the FDMS-3 (Fostex Disk Management System-3) format,  
as well as by the WAV file format (RIFF WAVE file format) using a DOS-formatted disk. As you can handle song  
data of the VF08 with a WAV file, it is possible to directly import/export data from/to a personal computer, to  
playback/edit a data file with various software applications, and to import a data file edited by a computer to  
the VF08.  
<Important notes for using a WAV file>  
About backup disks:  
• The save/load by a WAV file can be done only by using a disk DOS-formatted with FAT16.  
The VF08 executes the save/load of a WAV file when it recognizes the disk DOS-formatted with  
FAT16. The VF08 cannot recognizes a disk DOS-formatted with FAT32.  
• You cannot DOS-format a disk from the "Disk Format?" menu in the setup mode.  
A backup disk that handles WAV files must be DOS-formatted with FAT16 by a personal computer  
in advance.  
When a disk larger than 2 GB is DOS-formatted with FAT16, the disk is partitioned at the 2 GB  
maximum size. In such a case, the VF08 only recognizes the first partition and does not recognize  
the following partition(s). Therefore, the maximum available size of a backup disk for the VF08 is 2  
GB.  
To avoid an accidental erasure of data by overwriting, etc., we suggest to use a clean disk just  
formatted for the save/load of WAV files.  
About directory of a backup disk:  
• A WAV file saved is recorded in the root directory (in the first layer) on the backup disk.  
• A WAV file that can be loaded must be allocated in the root directory on the backup disk.  
A WAV file moved from the root directory to another area such as a folder cannot be recognized by  
the VF08, which may cause a malfunction.  
About file names of WAV files  
• A WAV file the VF08 saves is recorded with a file name "******##.WAV".  
• A WAV file the VF08 can load must have a file name "******##.WAV".  
The first 6 characters "******" are the title that is shown in the "Title Edit" screen in the setup mode.  
These characters can be changed when saving using a WAV file or edited by a computer.  
The following 2 characters "##" indicate the track number (1 to 24) for the save/load using a WAV  
file.  
The last ".WAV" is the file extension indicating that the file format is WAV.  
The VF08 does not recognize other file names than above. See the following description for each  
operation about details.  
By using the specifications above, you can load only the desired tracks of a WAV file or load a track-  
swapped WAV file. See "Loading a WAV file" described later for details.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save/Load of Song data  
<Note>  
Saving a WAV file  
If you save all data from "ABS 0" to "REC END", make  
sure to set the Edit Source Export function to Off.  
You can save a WAV file.  
Make sure that the DOS-formatted disk with FAT16  
is set. The following procedure assumes that the  
newly formatted "clean" disk is used for backup.  
While "Off" is blinking, press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display shows the screen for selecting a program  
to be saved. The program number currently selected  
blinks, while the data size of the program is shown.  
5
Press the [SETUP] key to enter the setup mode.  
1
The display shows the screen for selecting the Setup  
menu.  
Blinking  
Use the [JOG] dial to select "Save PGM" and press  
2
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display shows the screen for selecting the device  
to which the data is saved. "SCSI" blinks.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select a program to be saved  
and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
6
The display shows the screen for selecting a track to  
be saved. Initially, "All Track" blinks.  
Blinking  
Blinking  
While "SCSI" is blinking, press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
3
The display shows the screen for selecting the backup  
mode (FDMS 3 or WAV), where "WAV" blinks. (When  
a DOS-formatted disk is set, "WAV" initially blinks.)  
By rotating the [JOG] dial, you can select "From ** To  
**" (where the left field blinks initially) instead of "All  
Track".  
If you save data for all tracks (1 through 24), select  
"All Track". If you save data for any specific track(s),  
select "From ** To **" and specify the desired track  
numbers.  
Blinking  
While "WAV" is blinking, press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
4
Blinking  
The display shows the screen for selecting On or Off  
of the Edit Source Export function, where "Off" blinks.  
You can switches between On and Off by using the  
[CURSOR] keys .  
<To specify the desired tracks to "From ** To **">  
By rotating the [JOG] dial while the left ("From") field  
is blinking, you can select the track number from 01  
through 24. The number in the right ("To") field  
automatically follows the number in the left field (i.e.  
numbers in the left and right fields are always the same).  
Therefore, if you want to save a single track, you just  
have to set the right ("From") field and do not have to  
set the right ("To") field. For example, "From 02 To 02"  
will save only track 2.  
Blinking  
If you save all data from "ABS 0" to "REC END" (in  
most cases), you do not have to change the setting  
here.  
To specify tracks 5 through 12:  
•Enter "05" to the left field while the left field is  
blinking.  
•Press the [CURSOR </>] key to make the right field  
blinking.  
•Enter "12". (Note that the number for the right field  
must be equal to or larger than the left field.)  
<About the Edit Source Export function>  
The Edit Source Export function allows you to save  
the desired range of data between the Start and  
End points which are set when executing the Copy-  
paste or Move-paste function.  
Therefore, if you want to save only the specific range  
of data, you have to register the Start and End points  
before the save operation.  
Finally the screen shows "From 05 to 12" to save tracks  
5 through 12.  
See "Track Editing" in "Recorder Function" for  
details about how to set the Start and End points.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save/Load of Song data  
After selecting the track(s), press the [ENTER/YES]  
key.  
7
The display shows the screen for selecting a WAV file  
on the disk.  
If no file is recorded on the disk, "New File" blinks.  
You can select "Eject" by rotating the [JOG] dial.  
To remove the disk, select "Eject" and press the  
[ENTER/YES] key.  
•Showing the title and "-****MB":  
Even if the specified file is deleted, the space for  
creating a new WAV file on the disk is ****MB short.  
Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key shows "Disk Full!",  
followed by "Delete All WAV?".  
Blinking  
Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key again deletes all the WAV  
file on the disk and advances to the next step (for  
editing the file name).  
After completing the save operation, only the new WAV  
file will remain on the disk.  
<Hints>  
If the backup disk contains any existing program(s)  
previously saved, the display may show following  
screens after carrying out the previous step, depending  
on the available space of the backup disk.  
•Showing the title and "New File":  
There is enough space for creating a new WAV file in  
addition to the existing WAV files on the disk.  
Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key advances to the next step  
(for editing the file name).  
After selecting a file, press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display shows the screen for editing the WAV file.  
After completing the save operation, this new WAV file  
will be added on the disk.  
8
•Showing the title and "New File", and "-****MB"  
alternately:  
By rotating the [JOG] dial, you can set the desired  
numeric, symbolic or alphabetical character to the  
blinking point. You can move the blinking point by  
using the [CURSOR] keys.  
The space for adding a new WAV file to the existing  
WAV files on the disk is ****MB short.  
Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key shows "Disk Full!",  
followed by "Delete All WAV?".  
Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key again deletes all the WAV  
file on the disk and advances to the next step (for  
editing the file name)  
See the following table for the available characters.  
Upper-case alphabetical characters (A to Z)  
Numerals (0 to 9)  
Symbols (! # $ % & ' ( ) @ ^ _ -)  
After completing the save operation, only this new WAV  
file will remain on the disk.  
<Note>  
You can use up to 6 characters for a file name.  
Some characters entered are converted as shown  
below.  
• Upper-case alphabetical characters (A to Z): not  
converted  
• Lower-case alphabetical characters (a to z):  
converted to the corresponding upper-case  
• Numerals (0 to 9): not converted  
• Symbols (! # $ % & ' ( ) @ ^ _ -): not converted  
• Other symbols: converted to "_".  
•Showing the title and "****MB":  
To get enough space for creating a WAV file, the  
specified file on the backup disk will be deleted.  
By pressing the [ENTER/YES] key, "DEL" appears.  
Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key again will delete the  
specified WAV file on the disk and advances to the  
next step (for editing the file name).  
After entering the file name, press the [ENTER/YES]  
key.  
The save operation is executed and the display shows  
something like the one as below. As the file save goes  
on, the remaining data size shown on the screen counts  
down.  
9
After completing the save operation, the specified WAV  
file will be replaced with the new WAV file on the disk.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save/Load of Song data  
<About WAV files saved>  
•WAV file structure  
A WAV file on the backup disk has 24 files (one file  
per track) in the root directory of the disk.  
The file names are "******01.WAV" through  
"******24.WAV" where "******" shows the file name  
specified in step 8 above and each number (01 - 24)  
shows the corresponding track number.  
When saving data onto more than one disk, the current  
disk number is shown on the screen as "Disk*" (where  
* indicates the number).  
Immediately after the data save to each disk is  
completed, the disk is automatically ejected, and  
"Insert Disk*" blinks on the screen, prompting you to  
insert the next disk.  
If a track has no data recorded, the corresponding file  
with no data is created.  
Inserting the next disk resumes the save operation.  
###### 01. WAV  
###### 02. WAV  
###### 24. WAV  
•WAV file structure which is saved over more than  
one disk  
A WAV file is saved in order of track number (from  
tracks 1 to 24).  
During the save operation over more than one backup  
disk, the VF08 always calculates the available space  
of the disk automatically. If the VF08 knows that the  
available space gets smaller than the data size of the  
next track, it will change the disk when the data save  
of the current track is completed.  
After the save operation is completed, "Completed!"  
appears on the screen.  
•WAV file size  
When saving data by the WAV file format to a backup  
disk, the file size may sometimes increase compared  
with the data size in the current drive, depending on  
the recorded data condition such as the start time,  
end time, the data amount, etc. on each track.  
For example, if a track is recorded from ABS:0 (min.)  
to ABS:1 (min.) and ABS:10 (min.) to ABS 11 (min.),  
the file on the current drive has a length of 2 minutes,  
while the WAV file has a length of 11 minutes.  
Also as mentioned above, if a track has no data  
recorded, the corresponding WAV file with no data is  
created though the size is small.  
<Hint>  
In the save operation which requires more than  
one backup disk, if you use a backup disk which  
contains any program(s) saved, the display shows  
the screen as shown below.  
<Notes>  
•If the file name you are going to save duplicates with  
the existing WAV file name on the backup disk,  
"Warning! Already Exist" is shown on the screen and  
the save operation will not be executed. In such a case,  
change the file name according to the procedure above  
and carry out the save operation again.  
This screen is asking you weather to delete all  
existing WAV files on the disk or to eject the disk.  
To delete all the existing files, select "All Delete"  
and press the [ENTER/YES] key. All existing files  
are deleted and the disk is ready for saving data.  
If you do not want to delete the existing files, select  
"Eject" and press the [ENTER/YES] key. The disk is  
ejected so you can insert another disk.  
•A disk on which you have overwritten data many  
times may lower the access speed because of the disk  
fragmentation. Therefore, we suggest that you should  
use a newly formatted "clean" disk for backup.  
To select between "All Delete" and "Eject", press  
the [CURSOR] key.  
•If any other file but "******##.WAV" or folder, which  
cannot be recognized by the VF08, is created on the  
backup disk using a personal computer, the VF08  
cannot calculate the available backup disk space  
accurately. Accordingly, it may happen that the save  
operation cannot be completed. You should note this  
when changing the file name or creating a folder using  
your computer.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key)  
repeatedly until exiting the setup mode.  
10  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save/Load of Song data  
After selecting the desired track(s), press the INTER/  
YES key.  
6
Loading a WAV file  
The display shows the screen for selecting the load  
destination program to which a WAV file is loaded.  
You can select the program by using the [JOG] dial.  
Press the [SETUP] key to enter the setup mode.  
The display shows the screen for selecting the Setup  
menu.  
1
2
Use the [JOG] dial to select "Load PGM" and press  
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display shows the screen for selecting the device  
from which the data is loaded. "SCSI" blinks.  
While "SCSI" is blinking, press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display shows the drive name and "DOS Format",  
followed by the screen for selecting the WAV file to be  
loaded, showing the WAV file name and size.  
3
When the screen shows "Title" and "Size", the selected  
program will be deleted and replaced with the WAV  
file loaded.  
When the screen shows "Title" and "New PGM", the  
WAV file loaded will create a new program.  
If no disk is inserted, "No SCSI Disk!" is shown.  
<Note>  
If the current drive does not have enough available  
space for loading the WAV file, the size indication  
on the screen shows a negative value ("-***").  
In such a case, select a program that can be replaced  
with the WAV file loaded without causing the disk  
space shortage, or delete unnecessary programs by  
the "Delete PGM" menu in the setup mode.  
After selecting the load destination program, press  
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
7
When selecting a new program as the load destination  
(by selecting an option showing "Title" and "New  
PGM"), the load operation immediately starts.  
When selecting an existing program as the load  
destination (by selecting an option showing "Title" and  
"Size"), "Overwrite?" and "Sure?" appear. Pressing the  
[ENTER/YES] key will start the load operation.  
During the load operation, the screen shows something  
like the one as below.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired WAV file to  
be loaded.  
If more than one WAV file with different file names  
(the first 6 characters) is saved, you can see each file  
name (by the first 6 characters) in order when rotating  
the [JOG] dial. You can also select "Eject" to remove  
the backup disk.  
4
As the data load goes on, the remaining data size shown  
on the screen counts down.  
<Note>  
The VF08 cannot recognize any other file names  
but "******##.WAV" and cannot load such disks. A  
WAV file with an unique name (the first 6  
characters) is recognized as an independent backup  
file and can be selected.  
After selecting the desired WAV file, press the  
[ENTER/YES] key.  
5
The display shows the screen for selecting a track to  
be loaded.  
"All" blinks initially.  
Besides "All", you can select any one of tracks (01  
through 24) by rotating the [JOG] dial.  
When the load operation is completed, "Completed!"  
appears on the screen.  
<Note>  
The title of the program to which the WAV file is  
loaded is replaced with the WAV file name loaded  
(the first 6 characters).  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Save/Load of Song data  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeatedly  
until exiting the setup mode.  
8
To go back to the previous step or abort the operation,  
you can also use the [EXIT/NO] key or the [STOP] key.  
<< Special loading method when using a computer >>  
< Note>  
WAV files which can be saved/loaded by this recorder must have file names written as “******##.WAV.”  
Other file names cannot be acknowledged by this recorder.  
Unknown file names will not be acknowledged and could cause malfunction. Extreme care should be taken when  
changing file names and making folders on a computer.  
* The first six letters will be the title shown in the SETUP mode “Title Edit” display.  
* The last two letters “##” represent each track number (1-24) of the WAV file which are to be saved/loaded.  
* The last “WAV” is the extension which indicate that this is a WAV file.  
* File name of the WAV file which is to be saved in the backup disk of this recorder will all be recorded in capital  
letters. However, in certain computers, this WAV file name will be displayed in small letters.  
(*) Method to load specific tracks.  
The backup disk in which files are saved will contain files from “******01.WAV” up to “******24.WAV.” Should these  
files be deleted, moved from the root directory, for example, into a another folder or the file name changed which  
cannot be acknowledged, this recorder will not recognize this file.  
When a backup disk changed in this manner is loaded, only WAV files with file names “******##.WAV” which are  
located in an acknowledgeable root directory can be loaded.  
For example, if the “zero number of data” made at save is deleted from the backup disk and then load is executed,  
only WAV files recorded with any other sound can be loaded.  
(*) When loading WAV files saved in a multiple number of disks, they can be loaded by a special method  
derived from the above method.  
Assume that there is backup disc 1 saved with “******01.WAV” through “******12.WAV” and disc 2 saved with  
“******13.WAV” through “******24.WAV.”  
First, when backup disk 1 is loaded, files in tracks 1-12 will be loaded. At this point, tracks 13-24 will not be loaded  
and thus be non-recorded. Next, when backup disk 2 is loaded, files in tracks 1-12 remains intact and tracks 13-24  
only will be loaded.  
****** 12. WAV  
****** 24. WAV  
****** 01. WAV  
****** 13. WAV  
Backup Disk 1  
Backup Disk 2  
(*) Method in loading by changing the track.  
If the two letters “##” in file name “******##.WAV” in the backup disk are changed, it will be possible to load them  
on this recorder on a track different from that at the initial save. For example, if a WAV file named “ABCDEF01.WAV”  
on track 1 is changed to “ABCDEF03.WAV” this WAV file will be loaded on track 3.  
(*) Method in loading by changing the title.  
If the 6 letters “******” in file name “******##.WAV” in the backup disk are changed, it will be possible to load them  
on this recorder under a title different from that at the first save. Letters which can be used at changing the file  
name in a computer are those only indicated below. All of these letters must be one byte size.  
Alphabets  
Numerals  
Symbols  
: A-Z and a-z  
: 0-9  
: !#$%&’()@‘_=  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP mode  
SETUP mode  
The SETUP mode of the VF08 offers the “Changing the initial settings” menus, which configure the operating  
environment of the VF08, a “Check” menu that enables you to check the number of events for each track, and an  
“Execution” menu that executes certain operations, such as save and load and disk formatting. The “Changing the  
initial settings” menu include 16 parameters as shown in <Table-1> below. These parameters were set before the  
VF08 was shipped from the factory and these values are called the “initial settings.” Modifying these settings allows  
you to change the operating environment of the VF08. The “Check” menu provides two parameters “Checking the  
number of events” as shown in <Table-2> - “Checking the number of events” and “Checking the current drive  
information.”  
Also, as shown in <Table-3>, the “Execution” menus include three items: Load PGM, Save PGM, and Disk Format,  
which you can execute by selecting the corresponding SETUP menu. This chapter explains how to use the “Changing  
the initial settings” menus shown in <Table-1> and the “Check” menu shown in <Table-2>.  
For more information on the “Execution” menus, refer to the corresponding pages in the “Reference page” column  
in <Table-3>.  
<Table-1> “Changing the initial settings” menu  
Parameters  
Setting a time signature  
Setting a tempo  
Display  
Default setting  
Refer page  
99  
Community  
Signature Set  
Tempo Set  
Click  
001BAR 4/4  
001BAR 1 120  
101  
102  
103  
103  
Setting the metronome function  
Setting MIDI sync output signal  
Setting an MTC frame rate  
Setting an MTC offset value  
Setting the offset mode  
Off  
Midi Sync Out  
Frame Rate  
Mtc Offset  
Offset Mode  
Slave Mode  
Slave Type  
Rec Protect  
Digital In  
MTC  
25 frame  
00h 59m 57s 00f 00sf  
104  
104  
105  
ABS  
Off  
Vari  
Off  
Off  
Off  
00  
Setting the slave mode  
Setting the slave type  
105  
106  
107  
107  
108  
Setting the record protect function  
Setting digital input  
Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode  
Setting the MIDI device ID number  
Setting the drive  
Resolution  
Device ID  
Drive Select  
Fader Fix  
IDE  
Off  
Off  
109  
-
Setting the fader fix mode  
Setting the fader recall mode  
110  
Fader Recall  
110  
: Modes applicable program by program. They can be saved/loaded.  
: Modes applicable to all program. They cannot be saved/loaded.  
<Table-2> “Check” menu  
Check item  
Display  
Refer page  
108  
Community  
Check of the event number on the track  
Check of the current drive information  
Number Of Event  
Drive Information  
-
-
109  
<Table-3> “Execution” menu  
Execution item  
Display  
Load PGM  
Save PGM  
Disk Format  
Refer page  
Community  
Saving song data to an external device  
Loading song data from an external device  
Formatting an current drive disk  
80  
80  
18  
-
-
-
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP mode  
To enter the SETUP mode  
Entering the SETUP is possible only when the VF08 is in the Stop mode.  
While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] key on the  
1
<Note>  
operating panel.  
At shipping from the plant or when power is switched  
on again, the “Signature Set” menu will be reversed in  
white-black. Otherwise, when exiting from the SETUP  
mode, the SETUP menu that was displayed last will be  
reversed in black and white.  
When the [SETUP] key is pressed, the recorder enters the  
SETUP mode first stage and change to the display for  
selecting the SETUP menu. The white black reversed title  
indicates the currently selected menu and the (flash)  
indicates that other titles exist below.  
If the desired menu is selected via the [JOG] dial and the  
[ENTER/YES] key pressed, you can proceed to the actual  
setup procedure.  
2
<Important>  
* To exit from the SETUP mode or return to the previous  
level, press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key).  
* When selecting the desired SETUP menu, the  
[CURSOR] keys can be used in addition to the [JOG]  
dial.  
Time signature setting [“Signature Set”]  
Using the “Setting a time signature” menu, you can set a time signature of a given measure on the internal  
programmable Tempo Map. Also in this setting, the BAR (-002BAR, 1 , 00CLK) displayed at the head of the  
disk in the time base BAR/BEAT/CLK can be set within a range of -009BAR ~ -002BAR.  
For example, you can specify 4/4 for the first and second measures, and 2/2 from the third measure.”  
Setting a time signature and tempo will create a Tempo Map, which allows the VF08 to manage a song using  
the BAR/BEAT/CLK Time Base. You can also use the Metronome function.  
A time signature and tempo setting are required when MIDI clock & song position pointer are output to an  
external sequencer.  
New Registering of Time Signature  
* Initial Setting  
* Available bars  
* Available time signature  
:
:
:
001bar 4/4 beat  
001 ~ 999  
1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8,  
While in the previous step 2 display, select “Insert  
3
3/8, 5/8, 6/8, 7/8, 8/8, DEL  
64  
New Event” and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The “Insert New Event” display section will change to  
the display for setting up a new bar and the “002”  
numberwill flash.  
* Maximum setting points  
* The setting is applicable song by song.  
* The setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data  
* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.  
* Make sure you choose the right program before setting this  
mode.  
:
At this point, the bar figure displayed will be the bar  
figure setup last +1 and the signature figure displayed  
will be same as the last setting (Example: In the initial  
state,002BAR 4/4 ” will be shown.  
Select a program for which to set a time signature.  
1
2
In the menu selecting display, select “Signature Set” and  
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display will change to confirming the currently set  
signature. In the initial setting, the display will be as  
shown below to indicate that the bar offset is -002BAR,  
signature from the first bar is set to 4/4, and nothing is  
set after the first bar.  
flashing  
If the [JOG] dial is rotated, items displayed can be  
alternately selected. “-002BAR Offset” to setup the bar  
offset figure, “Insert New Event” to setup a new signature  
following the first bar, and “All Clear” to clear all  
signature/tempo settings, can be selected.  
Input the desired bar figure with the [JOG] dial and  
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
It will change to flashing of “4/4 .”  
4
5
Input the desired meter via the [JOG] dial and press  
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The input bar and signature figures will be set as shown  
in the following. This display is an example of setting  
the third bar to 3/4 beat. If the [JOG] dial is rotated,  
the editing point of bar or signature, like the figures  
shown below, can be input.  
flashing  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP mode  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The selected measure/signature setting will be deleted.  
3
4
After deleting, press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key)  
to exit from the SETUP mode.  
flashing  
<Note>  
You cannot register the “001BAR“ of “001BAR 4/4 .”  
The following bar numbers and time signatures can be  
entered via the [JOG] dial.  
<Note>  
Take care because this procedure wipes out the tempo  
setting as well as time signature setting.  
Bar  
You can enter are from 001 to 999.  
Time  
1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8, 3/8, 5/8, 6/8, 7/8, 8/8  
Signature or DEL  
“DEL” is used to deleted time signature data.  
Clearing All Time Signature/Tempo Data  
Next, to register other bar and time signature, repeat  
steps 2 through 5.  
<Note>  
6
7
Be careful because this procedure wipes out the tempo  
setting as well as time signature setting.  
Upon completion of registering, press the [EXIT/NO]  
key (or the [STOP] key) and exit from the SETUP mode.  
Under the above “Confirmation display,” select “All  
1
Clear” and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
A following display of “All Clear,” “SURE ?” will flash.  
This indicates the standby mode for clearing all  
signature setting data and the tempo data.  
Correcting the Registered Time Signature  
Under the previous “Confirmation display,” select bar/  
1
time signatures to be changed and press the [ENTER/  
YES] key.  
Input the desired signature via the [JOG] dial and  
2
flashing  
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The newly input signature will be setup.  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
2
Time  
Signature or DEL  
“DEL” is used to deleted time signature data.  
1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8, 3/8, 5/8, 6/8, 7/8, 8/8  
Except for the initial setting “001BAR 4/4 ,” other  
time signature settings and the tempo setting will be  
cleared at the same time.  
Upon finishing, press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP]  
key) to exit from the SETUP mode.  
3
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from  
3
the SETUP mode.  
Changing the Bar Offset Figure  
Deleting a Time Signature  
Under the above “Confirmation display,” select  
1
Under the above “Confirmation display,” select bar/  
1
“-002BAR Offset” and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
time signatures to be deleted and press the [ENTER/  
YES] key.  
The “-002” display will change to flashing.  
Press the [ENTER/YES] key again to make “ */* ” to  
2
flashing  
flash and input “DEL” via the JOG dial.  
flashing  
Input the desired offset value with the [JOG] dial and  
2
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
Offset value can be input in the -2 through -9 range.  
After correction, press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP]  
3
key) to exit from the SETUP mode.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP mode  
Setting a tempo [“Tempo Set”]  
The “Tempo Map Set” menu enables you to specify a tempo at a given point in a song that already has a time  
signature setting. For example, you can specify a tempo of 150 to the third beat of the 12th measure.  
Time signature and tempo settings make a Tempo Map, which is used by the VF08 to manage the song using the  
BAR/BEAT/CLK time base, and enable the metronome function. Tempo settings as well as time signature settings  
are required when you wish to output MIDI clock and Song Position Pointer to an external sequencer.  
<Note>  
The tempo set figure setup here is an approximate figure and thus not accurate. Therefore, although the tempo map be  
matched with a personal computer, they will gradually drift apart. In order to prevent this drift, the personal computer  
side can be set to either MIDI clock sync or, the MIDI sync output signal temporarily set to “MIDI Clock” the figure reset  
to make it possible for the computer to read the accurate tempo, and the return it again to MTC sync.  
Input the desired bar with the [JOG] dial and press  
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The bar value that can be input is identical with the  
above “signature setup.” When the [ENTER/YES] key  
is pressed, “beat value” will change to flashing.  
* Initial Setting: 001BAR 1st beat 120 bpm  
* Bar to register: Follows to the time signature setting  
* Beat to register: Follows to the time signature setting  
* Available tempo: 30 ~ 250, DEL (delete)  
* Maximum setting points:64  
* The setting is applicable song by song.  
* The setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the  
song data  
2
Input the desired beat with the [JOG] dial and press  
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The meter value that can be input is identical with the  
above “signature setup.” When the [ENTER/YES] key  
is pressed, “tempo value” will change to flashing.  
3
4
* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.  
* Make sure you choose the right program before setting  
this mode.  
Select a program for which to set a tempo setting.  
1
2
Input the desired tempo with the [JOG] dial and press  
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The tempo can be input within the range of 30 through  
250. When the [ENTER/YES] key is pressed, the tempo  
map value thus input will be set and return to the  
above mentioned “Confirmation display for tempo  
map.”  
Under the menu selection display, select “Tempo Set”  
and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The display will change, confirming the current tempo  
setting. At the initial setting, the display will be as  
shown below, indicating that tempo of the first beat  
for the 001 bar is 120 and subsequent tempo is not  
setup. “Insert New Event” should be selected at setup  
of a new tempo. When the [JOG] dial is rotated, the  
currently displayed items can be selected alternately.  
To register another tempo map, repeat steps 1 through  
4.  
5
6
Upon completing registering, press the [EXIT/NO] key  
(or [STOP] key) to exit from the SETUP mode.  
For a setup example, if it is attempted to setup the  
following tempo in the music that is set to [001BAR 4/  
4 ] and [005BAR 3/4 ] by the previous “signature  
setup,” as seen in the music score below, the tempo  
flashing  
New Registering of Tempo  
4
4
Under the above “Confirmation display,” select “Insert  
1
New Event” and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The “Insert New Event” section will change to new  
tempo setup display and “002” will flash. The bar value  
thus displayed will be the last setup bar value +1 and  
tempo value will be identical with the last setting  
(Example: In the initial setup state, “002BAR 1 =120”  
will be displayed.  
Tempo = 120  
Tempo = 90  
3
4
Tempo = 60  
Tempo = 120  
Tempo Map  
Tempo setting  
001 BAR 1 = 120  
Time signature setting  
001 BAR 4/4  
flashing  
003 BAR 1  
= 90  
005 BAR 3  
007 BAR 2  
= 60  
005 BAR 3/4  
= 120  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP mode  
Correction of the Registered Tempo  
Erasing of the Registered Tempo  
Under the above “Confirmation display,” select the  
1
Under the above “Confirmation display,” select the  
1
tempo map which is to be erased and press the  
[ENTER/YES] key.  
tempo map which is to be changed and press the  
[ENTER/YES] key.  
The same as before, “tempo value” will flash.  
The same as before, “tempo value” will flash.  
Input the desired tempo with the [JOG] dial and press  
2
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
flashing  
Upon completing registering, press the [EXIT/NO] key  
3
(or [STOP] key) to exit from the SETUP mode.  
Input the “DEL” with the [CURSOR >] key, and then  
2
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The selected tempo map will be erased.  
Upon completing registering, press the [EXIT/NO] key  
3
(or [STOP] key) to exit from the SETUP mode.  
<Note>  
You cannot register the “001BAR 1  
=120.”  
Setting the Metronome function [“Click”]  
“Setting the Metronome function” menu allows you to determine whether or not the VF08 outputs a metronome  
sound from track 6 during playback or recording. Turning the Metronome function on enables you to record your  
performance while playing the instrument accompanying the metronome sound.  
<Note>  
Metronome sound will be output from track 6.  
For this reason, when the metronome function is activated, a new sound source cannot be recorded on the  
track to which the metronome sound is to be output or sound recorded on this track cannot be played back.  
If the metronome function is not to be used, be sure to reset it to “Off.”  
* Initial Setting  
* Available setting  
* The setting is applicable song by song.  
* The setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data  
* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.  
* Make sure you choose the right program before setting this  
mode.  
:
:
[Off]  
[Off] or [On]  
Select “On” or “Off” with the [JOG] dial and press  
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The selected item will be setup.  
2
On  
Metronome sound will be output from  
track 6.  
Off (default)  
Metronome sound will not be output.  
Select “Click” in the menu selection display and press  
1
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The currently set item (Off or On) will flash (“Off” will  
flash if in the initial state).  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exit from  
the SETUP mode.  
3
flashing  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP mode  
Setting MIDI sync output signal [“Midi Sync Out”]  
The “Setting MIDI sync output signal” menu enables you to select the type of MIDI sync signals output from  
the MIDI OUT connector on the rear panel of the VF08 to an external MIDI device.  
The options are MIDI clock & Song Position Pointer, or MTC (MIDI time code). Select an appropriate option  
depending on the type of signal supported by the connected MIDI device.  
If you select MIDI clock & Song Position Pointer, first you need to set the time signatures and tempo as  
described previously. If you select MTC, you first need to set the MTC frame rate, the MTC offset time, and the  
MTC offset mode as described later.  
Select the desired MIDI sync signal with the [JOG]  
dial and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
• Initial setting: [Mtc]  
• Option: [CLK] (clock & Song Position Pointer),  
[MTC] (MIDI time code), or [Off] (no  
output)  
* You can set the parameters for each Program  
individually.  
2
CLK (Initial setting)  
MIDI clock and song position  
pointer will be output.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the  
song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the  
power to the VF08.  
Mtc  
Off  
MIDI time code will be output.  
Any MIDI sync signal will not  
be output.  
Select “Midi Sync Out” in the menu selection display  
1
and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The currently set item will flash. “CLK” will flash in  
initial setting.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from  
the SETUP mode.  
3
flashing  
Setting an MTC frame rate [“Frame Rate”]  
The “Setting an MTC frame rate” menu enables you to set the frame rate for MTC output from the MIDI OUT  
connector of the VF08 to an external MIDI device. If you have already set the type of MIDI sync output signal  
to [MTC], you need to set the frame rate. Use the frame rate of MTC received by the external MIDI device (or  
sequence software).  
Select the desired frame rate value with the [JOG]  
dial and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
It will be set to the selected frame rate.  
• Initial setting:  
• Setting range of frame rate: [24], [25], [29df],  
[29nd], [30df] or [30nd]  
* You can set the value for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the  
song data.  
[25] (25 frames)  
2
3
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from  
the SETUP mode.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the  
power to the VF08.  
<Note>  
Select “Frame Rate” in the menu selection display and  
1
There are no 29.97nd or 29.97df in the MTC standard.  
Use either 30nd or 30df unless you definitely need to  
synchronize the VF08 with NTSC video.  
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The currently set frame rate will flashes. “25” will  
flash in the initial setting.  
flashing  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP mode  
Setting an MTC offset value [“Mtc Offset Set”]  
The “Setting an MTC offset value” menu enables you to specify an offset time value - the difference between  
the time of MTC output from the VF08 and the ABS 00m 00s 00f 00sf time. You need to specify this value if  
you have selected [MTC] for the “Setting MIDI sync output signal” menu.  
With the initial setting of 00h 59m 57s 00f 00sf, for example, MTC of 59m 57s 00f 00sf is output at the ABS  
time 00m 00s 00f 00sf. You can also set an offset value from the 001bar 1beat 00clk value (bar/beat) on the  
Tempo Map. Refer to the next section for information on MTC Offset mode.  
• Initial setting:  
[00h: 59m: 57s: 00f: 00sf]  
• Setting range of offset time: 00h: 00m: 00s: 00f: 00sf  
~ 23h: 59m: 59s: 29f: 99sf  
* You can set the value for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the  
song data.  
flashing  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the  
power to the VF08.  
<Note>  
For example, if you set MTC Offset mode to “ABS” (See the  
next section) and you wish to start the song from MTC’s  
01h 00m 00s 00f, you may wish to set a preroll of three  
seconds with an MTC offset of 00h 59m 57s 00f.  
Move the edit point with the [CURSOR] key, input the  
desired offset with the [JOG] dial, then press the  
[ENTER/YES] key.  
Offset value thus input will be set.  
Advancing or retarding the input figure is carried out  
automatically with reference to the currently set MTC  
frame rate figure.  
2
3
Select “Mtc Offset Set” in the menu selection display  
1
and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
It will change to the second level display of the [Mtc  
Offset] menu and the currently set offset value will be  
shown.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from  
the SETUP mode.  
00h 59m 00f 00sf will be displayed in the initial state  
and “s” will flash. Flashing indicates the editable point.  
Setting MTC Offset mode [“Offset Mode”]  
If you have selected [MTC] in the “Setting Offset mode” menu, you need to select MTC Offset mode.  
This menu enables you to determine whether the specified MTC is output at ABS 00h 00m 00s 00f or at  
001bar 1beat 00clk (bar/beat) of the Tempo Map.  
<Notes>  
* As an example, if you set MTC Offset mode to “ABS” and you wish to start the song from MTC’s 1h 00m 00s 00f, you  
may want to set a preroll of three seconds with MTC offset of 00h 59m 57s 00f.  
If you select “BAR “ as the MTC Offset mode, a preroll of two measures is automatically set. Use 01h 00m 00s 00f; do  
not set a preroll value.  
* If you set Offset mode to “BAR“ and use MTC to synchronize sequence software on the computer, the tempo of the  
sequencer may sometimes slip gradually. This is because the tempo of the VF08 and the tempo of the software are  
slightly different even if both use the same tempo. Some sequence software can read the tempo output from the VF08  
correctly. We recommend that you use the tempo of the VF08 on the sequence software. No such problems will  
occur if the sequence software synchronizes the VF08 via MIDI clock, instead of MTC.  
• Initial setting:  
[ABS]  
• Offset mode option:  
[ABS] or [Bar ]  
* You can set the mode for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the  
song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the  
power to the VF08.  
flashing  
Select “Offset Mode” in the menu selection display  
and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
1
The currently set offset mode will flash. “ABS” will  
flash in the initial setting.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP mode  
Select the desired offset mode with the [JOG] dial  
and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from  
the SETUP mode.  
2
3
The selected offset mode will be set.  
[ABS] (Initial setting) The specified MTC offset time is  
output at ABS 00h 00m 00s 00f.  
[BAR  
]
The specified MTC offset time is  
output at 001bar 1beat 00clk of  
theTempo Map.  
Setting the Slave mode [“Slave Mode”]  
This mode allows you to choose the VF08 slave mode setting either On or Off.  
If you set the slave mode to “On”, the VF08 will synchronize to the incoming MTC (MIDI Time Code) from  
master unit. It will also synchronize to a type of external sync signal which you have chosen with the section  
“Slave Type setting.”  
Select “On” or “Off” with the [JOG] dial and press the  
[ENTER/YES] key.  
• Initial setting:  
• Slave mode option:  
[Off]  
[On] or [Off]  
2
* You can set the mode for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the  
song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the  
power to the VF08.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from  
the SETUP mode.  
Upon exit from the SETUP mode, the “SLAVE” icon  
will flash.  
3
Select “Slave Mode” in the menu selection display and  
1
This icon will change to constant lighting when VF08  
is correctly synchronized with the external equipment.  
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The currently set slave mode will flash. “Off” will flash  
in the initial setting.  
flashing  
flashing  
Setting the Slave Type [“Slave Type”]  
If you have set Slave Mode to “On” in the previous section “Slave Mode Setting,” you can choose what type of  
external sync signal that the VF08 synchronizes to. This mode allows you to choose the external sync signal type.  
• Initial setting:  
[Vari]  
<Notes>  
• Slave type option: [Vari], [Free] or [SPDIF]  
* You can set the mode for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the  
song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the  
power to the VF08.  
* You need to input MTC from an external device to the  
VF08 with any Slave Type.  
* The VF08 re-chase window is fixed to ten frames. That  
is, if an offset between the master device and slave device  
exceeds ten frames, the VF08 interprets that as out of  
sync, and tried to chase and lock to MTC sent from the  
master device. This operation is called “re-chasing.”  
During the re-chase operation, audio output is muted.  
If the slave machine slips with MTC from the master  
device by less than ten frames, the slave machine  
continues running while recognizing the slippage.  
* When you set the Slave Type, the Vari Pitch function is  
automatically disabled. (The “VARI PITCH” indicator  
turns off.)  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP mode  
Select “Slave Type” in the menu selection display and  
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The currently set slave type will flash. “Vari” will be  
flash in the initial setting.  
1
This is the mode whereby after chase  
locking, it will free run by the internal  
clock of VF08 or the digital in clock  
from the external equipment should  
the time drift away from that of the  
master.  
Free  
This is the mode whereby after chase  
locking, it will constantly run by vari-  
pitch so that the time does not drift  
away from that of the master by  
compensating the phase drift.  
Vari  
(Initial setting)  
flashing  
However, if digital in has been set, it  
will operate the same as for “Free.”  
This is the mode whereby after chase  
locking, it will free run by the S/P DIF  
clock only when there is S/P DIF digital  
signals from the master.  
However, if digital in has been set, that  
clock will have priority.  
Select the desired slave type with the [JOG] dial and  
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
It will be set to the selected slave type.  
2
SPDIF  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from  
the SETUP mode.  
3
Setting the Record Protect function [“Rec Protect”]  
The “Setting the Record Protect function” menu allows you to turn the Record Protection function On or Off.  
When this function in turned “On”, you cannot record, paste, or erase data. Use this function to protect your  
important data from being accidentally erased.  
• Initial setting:  
• Options:  
* You can set the mode for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the  
song data.  
[Off]  
[On] or [Off]  
<Note>  
When recording is disabled (“On”) and you try to record,  
paste, or erase data, the VF08 displays “Protected!” for a  
second, indicating that you cannot perform the operation.  
To perform the operation you need to enable recording  
(“Off”).  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the  
power to the VF08.  
Select “Rec Protect” in the menu selection display  
1
and then press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The presently set item (On or Off) will flash.  
“Off” will flash in the initial setting.  
flashing  
Select “On” or “Off” with the [JOG] dial and then press  
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
It will be set to the selected item (On or Off).  
2
3
Selecting “Off” enables recording; you can record,  
paste, and erase data.  
Selecting “On” disables recording; and you cannot  
record, paste, or erase data.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from  
the SETUP mode.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP mode  
Setting Digital Input [“Digital In”]  
In the [Setting digital input] menu, whether the signal assigned to tracks 7 and 8 are S/P DIF digital signal  
analog signals, can be setup.  
By using this function, it becomes possible to digitally record from external digital equipment (CD, MD, DAT,  
adat, digital mixer, etc.).  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from  
the SETUP mode.  
• Initial setting: [Off]  
3
• Options:  
[On] or [Off]  
* You can set the mode for each Program individually.  
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of  
the song data.  
<Note>  
When setting “Digital In” to “On”, “DIGI IN” appears on  
the Normal screen. While the VF08 receives a valid S/P  
DIF digital signal from an external digital device and is  
locked to it, “DIGI IN” steadily lights. While the VF08 does  
not receive a valid S/P DIF signal, “DIGI IN” blinks.  
If “DIGI IN” blinks when sending an S/P DIF signal from  
the external device, check the connection between the VF08  
and the external device, as well as the settings (for the  
digital output, etc) of the external device.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the  
power to the VF08.  
Select “Digital In” in the menu selection display and  
then press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
1
The presently set item (On or Off) will flash.  
“Off” will flash in the initial setting.  
<Note>  
When “Digital In” is set to “On”, if you enter the bounce,  
training or mastering mode, the “Digital In” setting is  
automatically changes to “Off.” Therefore, to perform the  
digital recording after exiting the move above, you must  
set “Digital In” to “On” again.  
flashing  
Select “On” or “Off” with the [JOG] dial and then press  
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
2
It will be set to the selected item (On or Off).  
Setting BAR/BEAT Resolution mode [“Resolution”]  
The “Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode” menu enables you to turn BAR/BEAT resolution mode on and off.  
The initial setting is “Off.” When you turn this mode “On”, the CLK (clock) digits will be always round off to “00”  
and be stored in the memory key while the VF08 is using the BAR/BEAT/CLK time base.  
That is, beat-resolution is used. Using this function allows you to automatically store a beat-resolution value of the  
IN/OUT points, START/END points and END point in real-time. Therefore, it is very convenient when you perform  
the Copy & Paste or Move & Paste operation in beat-resolution.  
Select “Resolution” in the menu selection display and  
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The presently set item will be flash (On or Off).  
“Off” will flash in the initial setup.  
1
For example, assume that you have stored the value for  
001bar 1 46 clk as the START point, and the value for  
002bar 4 51 clk as the END point.  
These values will be used as they are if BAR/BEAT  
resolution mode is turned off. However, the mode is  
turned on, the following values will be stored instead.  
The following example has a time signature setting of 4/  
4.  
001 bar 1 46 clk -> 001 bar 1 00 clk  
(A clk value of 46 will be rounded off.)  
002 bar 4 51 clk -> 003 bar 1 00 clk  
(A clk value of 51 will be rounded up.)  
flashing  
• Initial setting:  
• Options:  
* You can set the mode for each Program individually.  
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of  
the song data.  
[Off]  
[On] or [Off]  
Select “On” or “Off” with the [JOG] dial and press the  
[ENTER/YES] key.  
2
3
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from  
the SETUP mode.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the  
power to the VF08.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP mode  
Setting the MIDI device number [“Device ID”]  
The “Setting the MIDI device number” menu enables you to set the VF08 device ID number required to control the  
VF08 from a sequence software using MMC (MIDI Machine Control).  
The transmit device ID links to this setting. You can set the device ID from 00 to 99.  
However, if the device ID number of the message the VF08 receives is [7F], the VF08 will recognizes it to perform the  
corresponding operation, regardless of its device ID setting.  
Select desired device number with the [JOG] dial and  
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
• Initial setting:  
• Options:  
* You can set the mode for each Program individually.  
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of  
the song data.  
[00]  
[00] ~ [99]  
2
3
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from  
the SETUP mode.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the  
power to the VF08.  
Select “Device ID” in the menu selection display and  
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
1
The presently device number will be flash.  
“00” will flash in the initial setup.  
flashing  
Checking the number of track events [“Number Of Event”]  
The “Checking the number of track events” menu enables you to check the number of events on each track.  
Each track (including Additional tracks) of VF08 Programs consists of consecutive audio files (and “zero”  
files). The number of events represents the total number of audio files and 0 files. Each track can contain up  
to 512 events.  
If you are editing a song of typical length (about six minutes), repeated editing operation does not usually  
exceed this maximum number. (Exceeding this limit is called “event number overflow.”) Even a 20-minute  
song will not cause event number overflow. This is because the recorder system always optimizes the data  
structure by keeping the number of events low. However, if a recording on a track is scattered in different  
areas of the disk, or if you have made a very long recording on a single track and performed many edits, you  
should be wary of “event number overflow.” To avoid this problem, use the “Checking the number of track  
events” menu to check the number of events on each track prior to recording or editing.  
Select “Number of Event” in the menu a selection display  
and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
It will change to the "Event" second level and the  
event number currently in each track will be dis-  
played (The * symbol indicates there is data below).  
*** is the event number.  
Use the [JOG] dial to select another (01~24) to check  
the number of events on the corresponding track.  
1
2
3
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exit from the  
SETUP mode.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP mode  
The Drive Format Information [“Drive Information”]  
Format information of the current drive currently installed can be checked by using the “Drive Format  
Information” menu. Should any trouble occur in the VF08, providing the information obtained here to our  
nearest Fostex Service Station will be of great help in giving quick service.  
The following items will be displayed and can be confirmed.  
Select “Drive Information” in the menu selection display  
1
1. Manufacture / Model of the currently installed hard  
and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
disk.  
It will change to the "Drive Information" second level  
and the current drive information currently in use  
2. Format method  
3. Format type  
will be displayed (The symbol indicates there is data  
below).  
4. Simultaneously recordable number of tracks  
5. Number of bits at formatting  
6. Sampling frequency at formatting  
7. Present number of programs  
8. Present number of free blocks  
9. Audio file / maximum number of events and its  
program No.  
10. Specific capacity of the drive  
11. Remaining capacity of the drive  
12. Present software version  
As the [JOG] dial is rotated, information will be displayed  
one by one.  
2
3
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exit from the  
SETUP mode.  
Drive Setting [“Drive Sel”]  
In this “Drive Setting,” a switch is made between the current drive (E-IDE hard disk) and the backup drive  
(Removable SCSI drive). The saved song data can be played back by switching to the backup drive (SCSI).  
However, this will be only to the extent of confirming the saved data and should all 8 tracks be played back,  
it may create drop out of sound, and in some SCSI equipment, the channel possible for playback could be  
changed.  
<Note>  
The following operations cannot be executed when the drive is switched to “backup drive.”  
* Save/load of song data * Recording * Creating a new program * Deleting a program * Copy & paste and Move & paste  
* Erase  
* Track exchange  
* Setup of tempo * ON/OFF of metronome function  
* Setup of permission or denial of recording  
* Setup of time signature * Editing a title  
If power to the VF08 is switched again, the drive will automatically switch to current drive (E-IDE).  
In order to take out the removable disk when set to backup drive, press the [EXIT/NO] key while holding down the  
[SHIFT] key.  
The selected drive will be set.  
"IDE" indicates the 3.5-inch E-IDE hard disk and, "SCSI"  
the backup SCSI drive  
• Initial setting:  
• Options:  
* You can set the value for each Program individually.  
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of  
the song data.  
[IDE]  
[IDE] or [SCSI]  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exit from the  
SETUP mode.  
3
Select “Drive Sel” in the menu selecting display and  
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
1
When the drive is changed, the program number in the  
Normal screen will shown as indicated below.  
The present setting will flashes.  
"IDE" will be flashed in the initial setting.  
When the current drive is E-IDE (program display “P”).  
When the current drive is SCSI (program display “B”).  
flashing  
Press the [CURSOR </>] key, select "IDE" or "SCSI"  
and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
1
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP mode  
Fader Fix Mode Setting [“Fader Fix”]  
Whether the fader manipulation should be reflected on the sound volume or not can be set.  
The setup content will be held even if the main power is switched off.  
Select the desired item with the [JOG] dial and press  
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The selected item will be set.  
2
<Caution>  
The “Fader Fix Mode” can be made to function when set  
in other (Track, Master or Trk & Mst) than “Off” of the  
next item on the “Fader Recall Mode”.  
On  
For all modes, manipulation of the  
Track fader/Master fader will  
have not affect on the sound volume.  
Any accidental shifting of the fader  
position by vibration and  
• Initial setting:  
• Options:  
* You can set the value for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the  
song data.  
[Off]  
[On] or [Off]  
misoperation can be prevented.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the  
power to the VF08.  
Off (Initial setting)  
Manipulation of the Track fader/  
Master fader will affect the sound  
volume.  
Select “Fader Fix” in the menu selection display and  
1
press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The currently set will flash. “Off” will flash in the initial  
setting.  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exit from the  
SETUP mode.  
3
flashing  
Fader Recall Mode Setting [“Fader Recall”]  
In the "Setup of the fader recall mode" menu, whether each track fader/master fader settings should be  
recalled or not at scene recall, can be setup.  
Input the desired item with the [JOG] dial and press  
the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The selected item will be set.  
2
• Initial setting: [Off]  
• Options:  
[Off], [Track], [Master] or [Trk & Mst]  
* You can set the value for each Program individually.  
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the  
song data.  
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the  
power to the VF08.  
Off  
When scene is recalled, the fader  
(Initial setting)  
position immediately prior to  
recalling the scene will be directly  
employed without recalling the  
setup figures of each track fader and  
the master fader.  
Select “Fader Recall” in the menu a selection display  
1
and press the [ENTER/YES] key.  
The currently set will flash. “Off” will flash in the  
initial setting.  
Track  
When scene is recalled, setup figures  
of each track faders only will be  
recalled and not recall the master  
fader setup figure.  
Master  
Trk & Mst  
When scene is recalled, the setup  
figure of the master fader only is  
recalled and the track fader setup  
figures will not be recalled.  
When scene is recalled, each track  
faders and the master fader set up  
figures will both be recalled.  
flashing  
Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exit from the  
SETUP mode.  
3
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
(Digital Multitracker)  
Model VF08  
Date:  
Version: V1.00  
MIDI Implementation Chart  
Transmitted  
Recognized  
Remarks  
Function....................  
X
X
X
X
Basic  
Default  
Channel  
Changed  
X
X
X
X
X
Default  
Message  
Altered  
Mode  
********************************  
X
X
Note  
X
True Voice  
Number:  
********************************  
X
X
X
X
Velocity  
Note ON  
Note OFF  
X
X
After  
X
X
Key’s  
Channel’s  
Touch  
Pitch Bend  
X
X
X
X
Control  
Change  
X
X
Program  
Change  
X
True #  
********************************  
System Exclusive  
(rem. 1)  
(rem. 2)  
: Quarter Frame  
X
X
X
: Song Position  
: Song Select  
: Tune  
Common  
X
X
X
X
: Clock  
System  
Real Time : Commands  
(rem. 3)  
X
X
X
: Local ON/OFF  
: All Notes OFF  
X
X
X
Aux.  
: Active Sense  
Message  
X
: Reset  
X
rem.1: MMC (Device ID=00~99, 127), MTC, Identity reply  
rem.2: MMC (Device ID=00~99, 127), MTC, Inquiry  
Notes  
rem.3: START, STOP, CONTINUE  
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY  
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY  
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO  
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO  
: Yes  
X: No  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
MMC Command List  
Command list  
STOP  
Movement (Recorder)  
01: STOP  
02: PLAY  
PLAY  
03: DEFERRED PLAY  
04: FAST FORWARD  
05: REWIND  
DEFERRED PLAY  
F FWD  
REWIND  
06: RECORD STROBE  
07: RECORD EXIT  
09: PAUSE  
REC  
PUNCH OUT  
STOP  
40: WRITE  
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List  
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List  
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List  
LOCATE to Setting Data  
CUE/REVIEW (+/- 1~60 times)  
CUE/REVIEW (+/- 1~60 times)  
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List  
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List  
Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List  
41: MASKED WRITE  
42: READ  
44: LOCATE  
46: SEARCH  
47: SHUTTLE  
4C: MOVE  
4D: ADD  
4E: SUBTRACT  
MMC Response/Information Field List  
01: SELECTED TIME CODE  
03: REQUESTED OFFSET  
04: ACTUAL OFFSET  
08: GP 0  
Command  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE  
READ  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT  
READ  
09: GP 1  
0A: GP 2  
0B: GP 3  
0C: GP 4  
0D: GP 5  
0E: GP 6  
0F: GP 7  
48: MOTION CONTROL TALLY  
4C: RECORD MODE  
4E: TRACK RECORD STATUS  
4F: TRACK RECORD READY  
51: RECORD MONITOR  
READ/WRITE  
READ  
READ/WRITE/MASKED WRITE  
READ/WRITE  
Inquiry Message List  
IDENTITY REQUEST: F0, 7E, <channel>, 06, 01, F7  
IDENTITY REPLY: F0, 7E, <channel>, 06, 02, 51, 01, 00, 13, 01, **, **, **, **, F7  
51  
:Fostex ID  
01, 00  
13, 01  
**, **, **, **  
:Device family code  
:Device family number VF08  
:Software version  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Maintenance  
Cleaning the exterior  
* For normal cleaning, use a soft dry cloth.  
For stubborn dirt, moisten a cloth in diluted detergent, wring it out firmly, and wipe the dirt off.  
Then polish with a dry cloth. Never use solvents such as alcohol, thinner or benzene, since these will  
damage the printing and finish of the exterior.  
Specifications  
Recording/Reproducing  
Recording Medium  
Recording Format  
Save/Load Format  
Sampling Frequency  
Quantization  
A/D Converter  
D/A Converter  
No. of Recording Track  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3.5 inch, hard disk (E-IDE type)  
FDMS-3 (*)  
FDIO-1 (**)  
44.1kHz  
16-bit linear (Non expanded)  
20-bit 64 times, over sampling, Delta-Sigma  
24-bit 128 times, over sampling, Delta-Sigma  
8 real tracks + 16 additional tracks  
*2 tracks for simultaneous recording (Maximum)  
+/- 6%  
Vari Pitch Control  
Crossfade  
Recording/Reproducing Frequency  
:
:
:
10msec.  
20Hz ~ 20kHz  
Input/Output  
Input A, B  
Connector  
:
:
:
:
:
:
ø6mm Phone jack (Unbalanced)  
XLR-3-31 type connector (Balanced)  
50kor more (Unbalanced)  
1kor more (Balanced)  
Input Impedance  
Standard Input Level  
Phantom Power (XLR only)  
-50 ~ +4dBu  
+48VDC (Setting of ON/OFF with PHANTOM switch)  
HEADPHONE  
Connector  
Load Impedance  
Output Level  
:
:
:
ø6mm TRS Phone jack  
10~ 50Ω  
20mW or more (at 32)  
STEREO OUT L, R  
Connector  
Load Impedance  
Output Level  
:
:
:
ø6mm Phone jack  
10kor more  
-10dBV  
S/P DIF DIGITAL IN  
Connector  
Format  
:
:
COAXIAL  
IEC 60958 (S/P DIF)  
DIGITAL OUT  
Connector  
Format  
:
:
COAXIAL  
IEC 60958 (S/P DIF)  
MIDI IN/OUT  
Connector  
PUNCH IN/OUT  
Connector  
:
:
DIN 5 PIN  
ø6mm Phone jack (An optional FOOT SW Model 8051  
can be connected.)  
SCSI (Option)  
Connector  
:
D-sub half pitch 50 pin  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
General  
Connector  
Weight  
Power Supply  
Power Consumption  
:
:
:
:
300 (W) x 96 (H) x 217 (D) mm  
Approx. 2.4kg  
120VAC 60Hz, 230V~ 50/60Hz (AC inlet type)  
18W  
Accessories  
:
:
Owner’s manual  
Power Cable  
* Fostex Disk Management System-3  
** Fostex Data In Out-1  
Specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice for product improvement.  
Block Diagram  
L
R
EFF  
TRK 1  
PAN  
2BAND EQ  
GAIN  
MUTE  
EFFECT  
PAN  
PRE/POST  
ASP  
EFFECT  
PHANTOM (+48V)  
EFFECT  
SEND LEVEL  
MUTE  
EFFECT  
RTN LEVEL  
TRK 2  
2BAND EQ  
GAIN  
MUTE  
EFFECT  
PAN  
PRE/POST  
TRK 3  
PEAK  
ON  
to METER  
INPUT A  
2BAND EQ  
GAIN  
MUTE  
REC  
REC  
1
2
AD  
REP  
1
EFFECT  
PAN  
PRE/POST  
OFF  
REP  
REP  
2
3
TRK 4  
TRIM  
PHANTOM (+48V)  
REC  
REC  
REC  
REC  
REC  
3
4
5
6
7
2BAND EQ  
GAIN  
MUTE  
to METER  
REP  
REP  
REP  
REP  
REP  
4
5
6
7
8
EFFECT  
PAN  
PRE/POST  
HDR  
L
TRK 5  
DA/C  
MUTE  
GAIN  
2BAND EQ  
GAIN  
R
MUTE  
BOUNCE  
ST OUT  
EFFECT  
PAN  
PRE/POST  
MASTERING  
INPUT B  
ON  
REC  
8
TRK 6  
AD/C  
OFF  
2BAND EQ  
GAIN  
PEAK  
PHONES  
MUTE  
TRIM  
BOUNCE  
EFFECT  
PRE/POST  
TRK 7/8  
DATA OUT  
ENCODE  
BALANCE  
S/P DIF  
DATA IN  
MUTE  
DECODE  
GAIN  
S/P DIF  
2 TRK  
MASTERING  
EFFECT  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Installing the Model 8340 SCSI card  
Follow the procedure below to install the Model 8340 SCSI card in the VF08.  
Insert the SCSI card as shown in the figure below until  
2
the board meshes with the internal connector.  
With the component side up, insert the SCSI card gen-  
tly. Do not push the board with excessive force.  
<Notes>  
component side up  
• Before installing the Model 8340 SCSI card in the VF08,  
turn off the VF08 power and disconnect the power  
cord.  
• The SCSI card is comprised of precision parts.  
Be careful not to give a strong shock or excess of power  
when installing the card.  
SCSI card (Model 8340)  
• Follow the procedure below to install the card in the  
VF08. Note that Fostex is not responsible for any  
damage of products caused by the incorrect  
installation.  
After inserting the board, fix back the cover panel re-  
moved in step 1.  
Place the panel to the correct position, and fasten it us-  
ing the screws which are unfastened in step 1.  
3
Remove the cover panel located on the right side of the  
VF08.  
1
The two retaining screws will be used later for fixing the  
SCSI card in step 3.  
cover panel  
Unfasten the two screws.  
Fasten the screws not to loosen.  
Remove the panel.  
The blank panel is not used.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Declaration of EC Directive  
This equipment is compatible with the EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) - Directive on approximation of member  
nation's ordinance concerning the electromagnetic compatibility and with the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)  
- Directive on approximation of member nation's ordinance concerning electric equipment designed to be used  
within the specified voltage range.  
The Affect of Immunity on This Equipment  
The affect of the European Specification EN50082-1 (coexistence of electromagnetic waves - common  
immunity specification) on this equipment are as shown below.  
* In the electrical fast transient/burst requirements, surge, conducted disturbances by radio-frequency fields,  
power frequency magnetic field, radiate electromagnetic field requirements and static electricity discharging  
environment, this could be affected by generation of noise in some cases.  
FOSTEX DISTRIBUTORS LIST IN EUROPE  
* Including non-EU countries.  
* underlined: contracted distributors (as of August, 2000)  
<AUSTRIA>  
<ITALY>  
NAME: ATEC Audio-u. Videogeraete VertriebsgesmbH.  
ADD: Im Winkel 5, A-2325 Velm, Austria  
TEL: (+43) 2234-74004, FAX: (+43) 2234-74074  
NAME: General Music S.p.A.  
ADD: Via delle Rose, 12 S. Giovanni M. (RN), Italy  
TEL: (+39) 0541-959511, FAX: (+39) 0541-957404  
<THE NETHERLANDS>  
<BELGIUM>  
NAME: IEMKE ROOS AUDIO B. V.  
ADD: Kuiperbergweg 20, 1101 AG Amsterdam, The  
Netherlands  
NAME: EML Sound Industries NV  
ADD: Bijvennestraat 1A, B3500 Hasselt, Belgium  
TEL: (+32) 11-232355, FAX: (+32) 11-232172  
TEL: (+31) 20-697-2121, FAX: (+31) 20-697-4201  
<DENMARK>  
NAME: SC Sound ApS  
<NORWAY>  
NAME: Siv. Ing. Benum A/S  
ADD: P. O. Box 145 Vinderen, 0319 Oslo 3, Norway  
TEL: (+47) 22-139900, FAX: (+47) 22-148259  
ADD: Malervej 2, DK-2630 Taastrup, Denmark  
TEL: (+45) 4399-8877, FAX: (+45) 4399-8077  
<FINLAND>  
NAME: Noretron Oy Audio  
<PORTUGAL>  
NAME: Caius - Tecnologias Audio e Musica, Lda.  
ADD: Rua de Santa Catarina, 131 4000 Porto, Portugal  
TEL: (+351) 2-2086009/2001394,  
FAX: (+351) 2-2054760/2087488  
ADD: P. O. Box 22, FIN-02631 Espoo, Finland  
TEL: (+358) 9-5259330, FAX: (+358) 9-52593352  
<FRANCE>  
NAME: Musikengro  
ADD: ZAC de Folliouses, B. P. 609, 01706 Les Echets, France  
TEL: (+33) 472 26 27 00, FAX: (+33) 472 26 27 01  
<SPAIN>  
NAME: Multitracker, S. A.  
ADD: C/Garcilaso No.9, Madrid 28010, Spain  
TEL: (+34) 91-4470700, 91-4470898, FAX: (+34) 91-5930716  
<GERMANY>  
NAME: Studio sound & Music GmbH  
ADD: Industriestrasse 20, D-35041 Marburg, F. R. Germany  
TEL: (+49) 6421-92510, FAX: (+49) 6421-925119  
<SWEDEN>  
NAME: Professional Television AB  
ADD: Kavallerivagen 24, 172 48 Sundbyberg, Sweden  
TEL: (+46) 8-59798000, FAX: (+46) 8-59798001  
<GREECE>  
NAME: Bon Studio S. A.  
ADD: 6 Zaimi Street, Exarchia, 106.83 Athens, Greece  
TEL: (+30) 1-3809605-8, 3302059, FAX: (+30) 1-3845755  
<SWITZERLAND>  
NAME: Audio Bauer Pro AG  
ADD: Bernerstrasse-Nord 182, CH-8064 Zurich, Switzerland  
TEL: (+41) 1-4323230, FAX: (+41) 1-4326558  
<ICELAND>  
NAME: I. D. elrf. electronic Ltd.  
ADD: ARMULA 38 108 REYKJAVIK, ICELAND  
TEL: (+354) 588 5010, FAX: (+354) 588 5011  
<UK>  
NAME: SCV London  
ADD: 3A 6-24 Southgate Road, London N1 3JJ, England, UK  
TEL: (+44) 171-923-1892, FAX: (+44) 171-241-3644  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FOSTEX CORPORATION  
3-2-35, Musashino, Akishima-shi, Tokyo, Japan 196-0021  
FOSTEX CORPORATION OF AMERICA  
15431, Blackburn Ave., Norwalk, CA 90650, U. S. A.  
© PRINTED IN CHINA SEPT. 2000 8588 002 000 FX  
340292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Edimax Technology Network Router BR 6624 User Manual
Electro Voice Speaker EVF 1121S User Manual
Exmark Lawn Mower FR20KC User Manual
Extron electronic Stereo Receiver DVI RGB 200 User Manual
FireplaceXtrordinair Indoor Fireplace 98500507 User Manual
Fisher Price Motorized Toy Car 74260 User Manual
Fisher Spreader 2000 20364 User Manual
Frymaster Fryer 8196203 User Manual
Furuno Telephone FM 7000 User Manual
Gitzo Camcorder Accessories G1588 User Manual